Camel5111 User Guide - PDF (9933)

CAMEL
USER GUIDE
Air Conditioning Load Calculations
 ACADS-BSG
ACADS-BSG
18 High St Glen Iris VIC 3146 Australia
Phone +61 3 9885 6586
Fax +61 3 9885 5974
Email acadsbsg@ozemail.com.au
The computer program CAMEL and this User Guide are
Copyright by
ACADS-BSG
18 High St Glen Iris VIC 3146 Australia
First published for the Department of Housing and Construction 1981

Second Edition July 1987
Third Edition January 1991
Fourth Edition February 1998
Reprinted with amendments February 1999
Fifth Edition (V5.0) May 2002
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.1) Aug 2002
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.3) Dec 2002
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.4) Mar 2003
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.5) Jun 2004
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.6) Sep 2004
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.8) Oct 2006
Reprinted with amendments (V5.00.9) Dec 2007
Reprinted with amendments (V5.10.0) Sep 2009
Reprinted with amendments (V5.10.2) Oct 2011
Reprinted with amendments (V5.10.4) Jul 2013
Reprinted with amendments (V5.11.0) Jul 2015
Reprinted with amendments by ACADS-BSG (V5.11.1) DEC 2015
ISSN 0725-1998
ISBN 0 644 00800 8
Disclaimer
The information or advice contained in this document is intended for use only by persons
who have had adequate technical training in the field to which the User Guide relates.
The document has been compiled as an aid only and the information or advice should be
verified before it is put to use by any person. The user should also establish the
applicability of the information or advice in relation to any specific circumstances. While
the information or advice is believed to be correct ACADS-BSG, its officers, employees
and agents disclaim responsibility for any inaccuracies contained within the document
including those due to any negligence in the preparation and publication of the said
document.
Preface
This document is a User Guide for the computer program CAMEL - Carrier Air
Conditioning Method of Estimating Loads. It describes the program, the
procedure for using the program and the results. The program is based on the
methodologies described in the AIRAH/IRHACE Application Manual DA9 entitled -
'Air Conditioning Systems - Load Estimation and Associated Psychrometrics'.
The program can be licensed from ACADS-BSG Pty. Ltd. A copy of the User
Guide is supplied to Licensees. Separate copies of the User Guide and
Application Manual may be purchased from ACADS-BSG.
The program although originally developed by Australian Construction Services,
the Federal Government’s Construction Authority it has now been completely re-
written by ACADS-BSG Pty Ltd who distribute, support and maintain the program.
Between reprints of this document, ACADS-BSG issues to it’s members
supplementary program user advice notices. Further details of these notices and
the availability of the program can be obtained from the office of ACADS-BSG in
Glen Iris, Melbourne.
The fourth edition incorporates a description of the WINDOWS version of the
program which replaced the DOS based data entry program CAMLIN. This
involved a complete rewrite of Chapter 2 and the removal of Chapters 3 and 5.
This fifth edition describes the major update to Version 5 which replaces the
simple single zone analysis with an air handling unit/zone/room input thereby
enabling rooms and zones to be combined into air handling plants and the
psychrometrics to be carried out for a number of difficult system types. It also
describes the new form of the results and the many other enhancements that
have been included in this update.
Review and Revision

In order to assist with the periodic review and revision of this User Guide, users
are encouraged to make known their experience in using the User Guide and the
associated program and to notify any additional information which they can
provide or to which reference can be made. This information should be forwarded
to the ACADS-BSG Office in Melbourne.
Acknowledgements
Acknowledgement is also given to the people involved with the development of
the program, including the authors of this user guide and Ferdynand Kozlowski
who was the programmer for the conversion to WINDOWS and this latest version.
ACADS-BSG Date of issue July 2015
Mechanical Engineering Services User Guides
Users Guide for the Computer Program Camel

Murray Mason B.Sc.(S&V), B.E.(Mech.), F.I.E.(Aust), F.AIRAH, M.AAS
Tom Hamilton Dip.Mech.E., B.App.Sc.(Math.), Dip.Math.,
Trevor Kingston B.Eng, Grad.Dip.Comm.Comp., M.I.E.(Aust), M.AIRAH, M.ASHRAE
Contents:
1 Features and Limitations 1
1-10 General Description 1
1-20 Program Features 1
1-30 Program Limitations 3
1-40 Limitations Imposed by the Use of the Carrier Method 3
1-50 Limitations Imposed by the Program 4
1-60 The CAMEL Program and Associated Programs and Files 5
1-70 Modelling Different Systems 5
2 Entering Data - General 8

2-10 General Description 8
2-20 Getting Started 9
2-30 Main Screen 11
2-40 Setting Project Defaults 13
2-50 The Configuration Screens 15
2-60 The Summary Screen 17
2-70 AHU’s, zones and rooms tree 21
3 Entering Data – Project Screens 23

3-10 The Project Screens 23
3-20 The Project Tab Page 24
3-30 Weather Location 27
3-40 The Map Screen 33
3-50 The Schedules Tab Page 35
3-60 The Shading Tab Page 36
3-70 The Windows Tab Page 40
3-80 Glass Selection Form 46
3-90 The Walls Tab Page 49
3-100 The Chillers, Boilers and Circuits Tab Page 50
3-110 Preconditioners Tab Page 53
4 Entering Data – AHU Screens 56

4-10 The AHU, Zones and Rooms Screen 56
4-20 The AHU Tab Page 60
4-30 The AHU Coil Tab Page 66
4-40 The Zone and Room Tab Page 70
4-50 External (Walls & Roofs) Tab Page 79
4-60 The Partitions Tab Page 86
4-70 The Internal Tab Page 88
5 Calculating, Viewing and Printing Results 94

5-10 Calculate 94
5-20 The VIEW Screens 94
5-30 Project Results Tab Page 97
5-40 AHU Results Tab Page 102
5-50 Zones and Rooms Results Tab Page 104
5-60 Room Load Charts Tab Page 108
5-70 Printing Results Tab Page 110
5-80 Table Results Tab Page 112
5-90 Errors 114
5-100 Graphing the Load and Air Quantity Tables 114
5-110 Viewing Shadows on Walls and Roofs 117
5-120 Psychrometric Charts 118
6 Data Checking and Error Messages 120

6-10 Data Checking 120
6-20 Error Messages 120
6-30 Errors that cause the Calculations to Fail - (Fatal Errors) 120
6-40 Errors or Comments that do not Cause Calculations to Fail - (Non-Fatal Errors) 121
7 Technical Description 123

7-10 Heating and Cooling Loads 123
7-20 Outside air Quantity and Conditions 123
7-30 Outside to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger 124
7-40 Psychrometrics 125
7-50 Adjusted Room Sensible, Latent and Total Heat 130
7-60 Apparatus Load and Air Quantity Option 131
7-70 Light Weight Roofs 131
7-80 Modified Window Storage Load Factors (SFMOD) and Wall ETD's 132
7-90 Window, Wall & Roof Shading Calculations 136
7-100 Skylights 139
7-110 Azimuth Angles 139
7-120 Sun on the Normally Shaded Exposure 140
7-130 Operation in the Northern Hemisphere 141
7-140 Plant Operating Times 141
7-150 Winter Warm Up Capacity 142
Appendix A
Revised Equivalent Temperature Differences for Roofs Exposed to Sun and in Shade. 143
Appendix B
Peak Solar Heat Gain Through Reference Glass 144
Appendix C
Extract from MASTER.WEA file 145
Appendix D
List of Standard Walls and Roofs 146
Appendix E
Extract from CAMEL.WAR file 151
Appendix F
CAMEL & BEAVER Master Glass Data 152
Appendix G
Users Weather Data File 157
References 158
1 Features and Limitations
1-10 General Description
The program CAMEL calculates building air conditioning heating and cooling
loads and performs a psychrometric analysis to determine the air quantities for
each air handling unit, zone and room. It caters for the design of buildings located
between 50 North and 50 South latitude.
The program has extensive capabilities in terms of the psychrometric calculations
that can be performed and in terms of the shading devices that can be modelled.
These include shading from reveals and overhangs on both walls and windows
and shading from adjacent buildings or integral parts of the same building.
The methods employed are based on the principles set out by Carrier
International Corporation, as described in the AIRAH/IRHACE Application Manual
DA9 - Air Conditioning Systems [1] with extensions to these methods carried out
under contract to the Australian Construction Service (the Federal Government
Construction Authority) by Murray Mason, Tom Hamilton and Trevor Kingston
through ACADS-BSG Pty Ltd. The technicalities of some of these extensions to
the "Carrier" method are described in Section 5 of this User Guide. A thorough
appreciation of the design procedures outlined in the Application Manual and this
User Guide is essential for the fullest advantage to be gained from the use of the
program.
The program performs an analysis on a peak load basis only (i.e. no part load
analysis is performed). Interpretation and use of the output must take this into
consideration.
1-20 Program Features

The main features of the program are as follows:
(i) The program performs an hourly cooling load analysis on a design day either:-
 in each of the twelve months from January to December if the monthly 3 pm
design dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures are used (note these monthly
temperatures may be selected for some 600 Australian locations as well as
some other countries supplied with the program, or entered for a particular
calculation, or the hourly design temperatures extracted from the users own
weather data file) OR
 in each of the nine months from September to May (March to November in
the Northern Hemisphere) if the Carrier yearly range corrections (Table 1 of
DA9) are required to be used.
(ii) The program includes corrections for elevation above sea level to both the solar
radiation on windows, walls and roofs and the psychrometrics in calculating air
flows.
(iii) The program models air handling systems with either single or multiple zones
and if required, multiple rooms within a zone. The program performs a load
CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 1

analysis for each room, combines these loads into zone loads and then air
handling unit loads. The psychrometrics are carried out at air handling
unit/zone level and the air quantities can then be distributed to rooms on the
basis of load or floor area. When loads are accumulated for different rooms,
the program takes account of AS1668 – 2012 compartment formula in
modelling outside air if requested, allowing entry as l/s/person at room or
zone level which is then converted to a percentage outside air at the air
handling plant adjusted to comply (but not for VAV systems).
(iv) The program carries out a psychrometric analysis for each air handling unit
entered for a range of system types viz:
 Constant volume cooling with zone reheat
 Constant volume single zone heating and cooling (also used for RCHP
and Variable refrigerant multi head systems)
 Constant volume face and bypass
 Variable air volume
 Variable air volume with reheat
 Evaporative cooling - Direct and Indirect types
 Outside air Preconditioners - Temperature or Humidity controlled.
(v) Coil performance can be stipulated by the nomination of a by-pass factor, the
apparatus dew point or the leaving coil conditions or by fixing the supply air
quantity.
(vi) The program can simulate the operation of a return/exhaust air heat
exchanger which can be installed on the outside air intake to an individual
AHU or on, or as a Preconditioner to serve one or more AHU(s).
(vii) The program models shading from overhangs with or without a drop (at the
extremity of the overhang) and/or symmetrical or unsymmetrical reveals on
windows and walls with provision for a solar transmission factor to be
specified for each shading surface. This allows opaque or partially
transparent shading panels to be modelled. Shading can also be applied to
roofs and skylights.
(viii) Shading panels may be at any angle to the window or surface and may have
a “gap” between the shading surface and the wall or window.
(ix) Shading from adjacent building and portions of the current building including
light wells, etc. can be modelled.
(x) The location of windows/skylights in walls/roofs entered by the user enables
the effects of shading from overhangs and reveals and from adjacent
buildings on both windows, walls and roofs to be accounted for.
(xi) The Carrier storage load factors have been modified to more realistically
model the effects of shadows from overhangs, reveals and adjacent
buildings as they pass across walls and windows.
(xii) The calculation of heat gains through roofs (Effective Temperature
Differences) has been extended to cater for lightweight roofs down to 10
2 2
kg/m (the Carrier data for roofs caters for roofs down to 100 kg/m ).
(xiii) Minimum air quantities can be entered for rooms or zones, including ,for
VAV systems, a minimum turn down of VAV boxes.
(xiv) The original Carrier storage load factor data has been graphically
interpolated to enable any azimuth angle to be used for external walls and
windows.
(xv) The building can be rotated simply by entering a rotation angle (rather than
altering all the azimuth angles on each wall in each zone).
(xvi) Wall and roof types can be selected from a file of often used materials
included with and accessed by the program. These wall and roof types are
identical to those used in the energy program BEAVER and this facility
therefore assists in the interfacing of the data between these two programs.
2 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

(xvii) A percentage of the load through external walls/roofs and of internal lighting,
equipment etc. loads can be specified as a return air load.
(xviii) Air handling units can be nominated as having their cooling supplied by the
central chiller plant and/or their heating supplied by the central boiler plant
such that the boiler and chiller capacity in projects with a mixture of
packaged and central station air handling units can be determined.
(xix) Packaged AHU may be grouped on to “circuits” to allow the calculation of the
outdoor unit capacity for multi-head variable refrigerant systems, or the
combined capacity of water cooled packaged units on a condenser loop.
(xx) An unconditioned room through which return air passes from selected rooms
on the same AHU can be entered with its own fabric and internal loads.
(xxi) The zone thermostat can be located in one of the rooms for that zone instead
of the return air duct for that zone.
(xxii) Desiccant humidity control units can be attached to individual AHUs to
precondition the outside air to maintain a nominated room RH
(xxiii) Preconditioners serving a number of AHUs can be modelled with
temperature control (cooling coil) or humidity control (desiccant wheel) with
or without a fresh to exhaust air heat exchanger.
(xxiv) The program allows the entry diversity factors for people lights and
equipment when calculating chiller capacity.
(xxv) The results can be viewed selectively and built up into a user defined print
file. Templates can be set up and stored between runs with predefined
sections of the results for viewing and printing.
(xxvi) The loads, air quantities and temperatures at each hour of the design day for
each month can be displayed graphically for each or a number of rooms,
zones and air handling units as appropriate. For reheat systems, the reheat
can also be graphed.
(xxvii) A psychrometric plot is available for each air handling unit.
(xxviii) A dynamic view of the shadows cast on each external room surface by time
and by month is provided.
(xxix) Items of input data can be globally changed throughout the project to enable
‘what if’ scenarios to be quickly investigated.
1-30 Program Limitations

The limitations of the program can be subdivided into those that are inherited from
the use of the Carrier Method of calculation and those that are imposed by the
program itself. The majority of the limitations are minor and of significance only in
special circumstances. However, a few of the limitations may occasionally have
considerable effect on the results, and a careful assessment of their implication
must be made before the results from the program can be confidently used.
1-40 Limitations Imposed by the Use of the Carrier Method

(i) Cooling load calculations are based on a single design day in each month
considered and the program cannot therefore be used for determining
energy consumption.
(ii) The Carrier method does not make any allowance for the effect of mean
radiant temperature on inside comfort conditions. No provision is made in
the program for the calculation of mean radiant temperature, however the
user can input a 'revised' temperature, for the inside design conditions
(based on the procedure described on page 18 of DA9).
(iii) Storage factors for calculation of thermal storage effects of solar heat gain
through glass and from lights are based on empirical calculations in the

Carrier method. These calculations were substantiated by experiment
originally but did not make detailed allowance for the surface coefficients of
the building materials. The only allowance made in the Carrier manual is a
halving of the floor mass if a rug is on the floor. Present day building
materials offer a whole range of finishes to walls, floors and ceilings that can
often considerably inhibit the transmission of heat into the structure. The
program does not offer any more accurate means of determining the thermal
storage effects. The User may however make an assessment of the
significance of a reduction in the thermal storage effect by re-running the
program with a reduced mass per unit floor area (storage mass).
(iv) The method only considers vertical walls and windows and horizontal roofs
and skylights (windows).
(v) Solar heat gains through glass are based on internal and external wind
velocities as stipulated in Chapter 4 of DA9.
(vi) No allowance is made for ground reflection or reflection of solar radiation
from adjacent buildings. Reflection from adjacent buildings can have a
significant effect if solar reflecting glass is installed in the neighbouring
building.
(vii) Although the plant operating hours may be entered between 1 and 24 the
hourly loads are calculated on the basis of plant operation being restricted to
12, 16 or 24 hours and for 12 and 16 hour, operation commences at 6 am
(viii) No allowance is made for daylight saving and displacement from time zone
longitude.
1-50 Limitations Imposed by the Program

(i) Only one winter heating load is calculated for each zone on the basis of the
entered internal and external conditions and the solar, internal, return and
supply duct loads being ignored.
(ii) The winter 'U' values are calculated from the entered summer 'U' values by
correcting for the different internal and external film coefficients. Where the
summer 'U' values represent components which are neither vertical nor
horizontal (eg. pitched roof) or contain air gaps or reflective sheeting, the
winter 'U' values computed are only approximate.
(iii) In the heating load analysis no provision is made for heat loss through
basement walls and floors below ground level as described in Ch. 6 of DA9.
(iv) The program does not provide for solar heat gain through glass blocks
(Table 19 in DA9).
(v) The multipliers for solar altitudes below 40 (included in Table 18 in DA9 and
applicable to outside shading screens with 17 horizontal slats) is not
included in the program.
(vi) No provision is made for excess heat and moisture for short term occupancy
by people (refer page 97 of DA9).
(vii) No provision is made for the inclusion of storage effects from swing. If
required, however, this can be allowed for manually (after running the
program) by adjusting the peak cooling load in the program output, as
described in the footnotes in Table 12 of DA9.
(viii) The program does not include moisture absorption and latent heat gain
reductions (as described on page 104 of DA9).
(ix) For the cooling load estimate, the program provides for heat gain to ducts as
a percentage of room sensible heat. This percentage figure is input by the
user and is not calculated in the program (ie. it does not follow the method
outlined in chart 3, page 108 in DA9). The user should therefore, after
running the program, check the input percentage against the calculated
room sensible heat in this Chart.

(x) The formulation used in the program for the saturation curve in the
psychrometric chart restricts the apparatus dew point to the range 2C to
28C, which should however adequately cover the range normally
encountered in air conditioning systems design.
(xi) In calculating the thermal storage effects from lights the program cannot
provide for lights turned on prior to the time the plant is switched on (6 am).
(xii) The program makes provision for the user to nominate some of the design
parameters associated with a number of psychrometric processes. The
limitations associated with the use of these options are stated in Section 5 of
this User Guide.
(xiii) The number of air handling units, zones and rooms that can be processed is
limited to 600 each.
1-60 The CAMEL Program and Associated Programs and Files

The CAMEL program comprises:-
 The main WINDOWS program (CAMEL.EXE) in which the input data is entered
and all other operations are controlled,
 The main calculation program (CAMCALC.EXE) which is executed from within
the main CAMEL program,
 A configuration file (CAMEL.CFG) which stores things like the default drives for
data and results files. These can be changed under “Configuration” on the main
CAMEL screen,
 A "key" file (CAMEL.KEY) that contains the user details,
 A file containing the walls and roof 'U' values and densities (CAMEL.WAR),
 A file containing the 3 pm monthly design dry and wet bulb temperatures
(MASTER.WEA). This file contains data for over 600 locations. For details
of how this weather data was compiled see Reference 6.
The file can be added to by the user (ie. additional locations with the
appropriate data can be added) but the format of the file must be strictly
adhered to. An extract from this file is included in Appendix C. Note that the
last figure on each line of the data is an arithmetic sum of all the values on
that line. This is used to check that the data has not been inadvertently
changed or corrupted.
 A file containing over 200 “master” glass types (BMWindow.txt) (which
correspond to those in BEAVER – the Energy Calculation Program) as well the
corresponding User entered glass file (BUWindow.txt). Both these files are
typically stored in separate directory eg. CAMEL BEAVER GLASS DATA
 Other files used by the program including a number of .DLL and .VBX files.
1-70 Modelling Different Systems

Various systems may be directly modelled in CAMEL with the psychrometrics
controlled by various means. The Technical details of how each system is
modelled is included in Chapter 5 and the various means of defining the
psychrometrics are:.
(a) a bypass factor
(b) a bypass factor and the coil ADP
(c) the coil leaving dry bulb temperature in which case the program calculates
the leaving wet bulb temperature.
(d) both the coil leaving dry bulb and wet bulb coil temperatures
(e) a nominated supply air quantity, in which case the leaving coil dry bulb
and wet bulb are calculated.

(f) a nominated supply air quantity with a fixed bypass around the coil in
which case the type of bypass (MIXed or RETurn) must be nominated
together with either the coil bypass factor or the coil leaving temperature
(DB or DB and WB).
In all cases it is assumed that the entered room dry bulb condition is maintained
(at design conditions) and if the room sensible heat factor differs from zone to
zone or room to room then the room relative humidity will vary accordingly.
The basic air systems modelled by CAMEL are:
 Constant volume cooling with zone reheat
 Constant volume single zone heating and cooling (also used for RCHP and
Variable refrigerant multi head systems)
 Constant volume face and bypass
 Variable air volume
 Variable air volume with reheat
 Evaporative cooling
 Outside air Preconditioners
In addition extensions to these can be made as described below.
Mixed or Return air bypass systems.

This is used when the calculated dehumidified air quantity is fixed by the leaving
coil conditions but the entered supply air quantity is required to be higher than the
dehumidified air quantity. The excess of supply air over dehumidified air may be
all return air or a mixture of return and outside air and is bypassed around the coil
through a fixed bypass.
Dump back system

This situation arises when an entered supply air quantity (on the AHU-Coil Tab
Page) is less than the calculated dehumidified air quantity (using the entered
bypass factor or leaving coil conditions). In this situation the type of bypass must
be MIXED.
100 Percent Outside air plant

For a 100% outside air plant simply nominate the outside air as 100% (Ahu Tab
Page). In this situation all return duct gains are assumed to apply to the
exhausted air and are ignored. The program iterates to a solution where the
dehumidified air quantity equals the outside air quantity.
Any other percentage can be entered for outside air. This is taken as a
percentage of the dehumidified air quantity. If a minimum air quantity is also
entered, the program calculates the outside air quantity as a percentage of the
calculated dehumidified air quantity and then if the dehumidified air quantity is
less than the minimum, the program increases the supply air quantity to the
minimum.
Example: if the outside air quantity is entered as 100% and the program
calculates a dehumidified air quantity of say 1000 L/s. If now the user also wants
a minimum air quantity of 4 Air Changes and this is equal to 1250 L/s then the
program increases the supply air quantity but not the outside air. If the user wants
the outside air to be equal to the supply air quantity a rerun of the program is
required with the outside air also set to 4 Air Changes.
Outside to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger

Simply enter the Heat Exchanger Efficiency on the AHU Tab Page provided the
Heat Exchanger only serves that one AHU. (A Heat Exchanger may also be
included in a preconditioner and serve multiple connected AHU’s.)

Desiccant Humidity Control Unit (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)
Desiccant Humidity Control Units are connected before the AHU and pre-process
the outdoor air. When entered on the AHU Tab the entered unit only dehumidifies
the outside air supplied to that AHU. (A HCU may also be included in a
preconditioner and serve multiple connected AHU’s.) The way the desiccant
humidity control unit is modelled in CAMEL is detailed in clause 7-40
Psychrometrics.
Provision is provided for entry of the DX cooling coil capacity (when the pre-
cooling coil is Chilled Water) and/or the moisture removal at the Design
conditions (entered on the Project Screen) for a selected desiccant humidity
control unit. It enables a re-run of CAMEL with the actual DX cooling coil capacity
and/or the actual moisture removal of a selected humidity control unit for a
particular manufacturer’s unit so that the capacity of the main AHU and chilled
water pre-cooling coil (if it is a CW coil) can be more accurately estimated.
Outside Air Preconditioner (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)

Outside air preconditioners can be entered (on the Preconditioners Tab Page on
the Project Screen) and connected to any number of the entered AHU plants.
The type of Preconditioner can be:
 Temperature Controlled (Cooling and/or heating Coil) with or without an
outside to exhaust air heat exchanger on the outside air inlet to the unit.
 Humidity Controlled (Desiccant Wheel) with or without an outside to exhaust
air heat exchanger on the outside air inlet to the unit. Refer 7-40
Psychrometrics - Desiccant Humidity Control Unit for description of how the
HCU is modelled.
 An outside to exhaust air heat exchanger only.
The Air Handling Units that are connected to the preconditioner can be nominated
on the Tab Page (as from AHU m to n) or individually on each AHU Tab Page.
The condition of the outside air supplied to each connected AHU is then the
leaving conditions for the particular preconditioner connected to a particular AHU.
Provision is provided for entry of the DX cooling coil capacity (when the pre-
cooling coil is Chilled Water) and/or the moisture removal at the Design
conditions (entered on the Project Screen) for a selected desiccant humidity
control unit. It enables a re-run of CAMEL with the actual DX cooling coil capacity
and/or the actual moisture removal of a selected humidity control unit for a
particular manufacturer’s unit so that the capacity of the main AHU and chilled
water pre-cooling coil (if it is a CW coil) can be more accurately estimated.
Evaporative Air Cooling

For direct evaporative cooling the program assumes 100% outside air and the
evap cooler efficiency is entered on the AHU-Coil Tab Page. As normal comfort
outside air temperatures (hottest day in each month) are used the room internal
design temperature may need to be higher than normal otherwise excessive air
quantities will result. To achieve an acceptable air change rate re-runs of the
program may be required.
For indirect evaporative cooling the program assumes 100% outside air and
provides on AHU-Coil Tab Page the means of expressing the effectiveness of the
indirect evaporative cooler. The choice is between:
 Wet Bulb approach effectiveness
 Dew Point Efficiency
 Leaving DB
The assumptions listed for each of the above may be invalid and the user may,
after running CAMEL, have to change the entered values based on the ambient
conditions at the time of the peak load.

2 Entering Data - General
2-10 General Description
The input data for CAMEL is entered on two sets of screens accessed via the
Menu Bar or the appropriate Button – Project or AHU, Zone and

Room on the Tool Bar. Within each of these sets of screens individual Tab
Pages are accessed by selecting the appropriate tab at the top of the screen.
CAMEL requires a minimum 600 X 800 (SVGA) screen resolution. VGA screens
(480 x 640) cannot display the complete CAMEL screens. If the CAMEL screens
are not fully visible then the user must use the WINDOWS setup to change the
screen resolution.
Moving Around the Screens

There are two types of screens in CAMEL, those with a tabular spreadsheet type
format where each field is a cell in the table and those with separate (boxed)
fields.
To move from field to field (or cell to cell) the mouse can be used to move directly
to a field or cell while from the keyboard: -
 the TAB key or down arrow moves to the next field
 the shift TAB or up arrow moves to the previous field.
In fields/cells that are combo boxes with drop down lists: -
 In the boxed field format the drop down list is brought up by either clicking
the mouse or hitting function key F10.
 In the tabular format the mouse must be used to bring up the list.
In any combo box the list can be traversed using the up and down arrow keys, by
direct selection with the mouse or typing the first letter eg. L for Litres/sec.
In the tabular screens the equal sign on the keyboard, copies from either the left
in a row or from above in a column depending on the particular screen.
Editing a Field
In the boxed fields once the cursor is moved to the field either by using the
mouse, the tab key or the up and down arrow keys, the value in the field is
highlighted. Hitting delete, backspace or the space bar will clear the field. Typing
a value at this point will overwrite the existing value. Clicking on the value or
using the left and right arrow keys allows the user to edit the specific numbers or
letters in the field.
In the tabular format once the cursor is moved to a particular cell clicking the left
mouse will invoke edit mode and the value in the cell will be highlighted. Editing is
then as for the box field format.
Selection Lists
The mouse symbol with a red right button adjacent to a field indicates that
selection is available from a list or pop up form which in a number of cases allows
the user access to other screens for editing eg. to edit or add another item in the
selection list.

Data Validation
As the data is entered on each screen, various data checks are made. Range
checks are made on each field as data is entered. Consistency checks are made
between items as they are entered and a smiley face on the tool bar changes
colour between green (no errors) and red (errors). Clicking on the smiley face
when it is red causes a list of the current errors on this screen to be displayed.
At the top of the SUMMARY Screen there is a validate button which when clicked
invokes a series of more extensive cross checks on the data in different screens.
This is further described in clause 6-10.
When all the input data is entered and validated, the calculations can be
performed after which the results can be viewed and/or printed.
The Data
The data entered into CAMEL is stored in a data base (Access) but before doing
the calculations, the data is transferred to an ASCII text file. This is achieved by
Saving (or Save As..). The reason for this is that the calculations are carried out
by a separate Fortran program formerly called CAMEL but now in this WINDOWS
version called CAMCALC and this program has as input, the ASCII text file.
In theory there is no need to SAVE your data until you wish to do the calculations
because even if someone “pulls the plug” the data will be in your project data
base. Murphy's 39th law however states that if you are assured nothing will ever
go wrong it will go wrong; so on a large job it is a good idea to SAVE your data in
the text file every so often as a back up to the data base.
A description of each input data item is given in the following clauses with a cross
reference where appropriate, to the AIRAH/IRHACE Air Conditioning Load
Estimation and Psychrometrics Application Manual (DA9) and/or sections of this
Users Guide. Reference to this Manual is given as table and/or page numbers,
eg. (Table 1, pp. 10-13 of DA9).
The user is not precluded from obtaining values for input data items from sources
other than DA9, but extreme care should be taken to ensure that any such values
are truly appropriate.
Items of data marked with a ' # ' are mandatory if that particular Tab Page,
column or line is entered or as further detailed in the particular clauses relating to
that input item. All other values are optional and may be left blank when not
required.
2-20 Getting Started

To become familiar with the program it is suggested that you open the sample
project included on the supplied CD. From File on the Menu Bar in the MAIN
Screen, select Open Project and from the list of data files, select, by ‘double
clicking’ the mouse, the sample project SAMPLE.DAT.
Having opened the project it is suggested you view the various screens and Tab
Pages taking note of the Help button available on each screen. General help on a
particular screen can be accessed by clicking the Help button. All fields have
range checks and specific help is accessed by hitting function key F1.
The data is grouped into general project information and the Air Handling Unit;
zone and room data accessed through the Project or AHU button and it
is simply a matter of working your way through the screens and reviewing (or in
the case of a new project inputing) your data.
The Tab Pages on the Project Screen are:-
 Project - General Project Information including the job location
 Schedules - Schedules for people, lights and equipment
 Shading - Window and Wall Shading Schemes

 Window - Details of the windows by type
 Chillers and Boilers – Details of Chiller and Boiler pump and piping heat
losses and gains
 Walls - Details of any special walls by type
 Preconditioners - Outside air preconditioners
The Tab Pages on the Air Handling Unit Screen are:-
 AHU – General input for the AHU
 AHU Coil – Air handling unit coil details
 Zone and Room – General information about zones and rooms
 External - External Walls and Roofs
 Internal - Internal loads; People, Lights and Equipment
 Partitions - Internal Floors, Ceilings and Partitions
Data is entered for each Air Handling Unit (which is primarily the data for sizing
the coil) and for each zone in the air handling unit. Individual rooms in each zone
can also be entered but this is optional. The program apportions supply air to the
rooms on the basis of load or floor area as indicated by the user. If individual
rooms are not required to be entered each zone comprises ‘one room’ containing
all the external surfaces, internal loads, etc. for that zone.
There is also a Summary screen accessed from the Main Screen. On this, red
frowning or green smiley faces appear representing each Tab Page for which
data has been entered. Double clicking on any smiley face will drop the user into
the particular Tab Page. To remove any errors double click on the particular red
face with the left mouse and drop into that Tab Page where the error(s) can be
displayed by clicking on the red face on that screen.
To perform the calculations the project must first be validated then saved using
SAVE or SAVE AS, in the File Menu. Validation is performed from the
SUMMARY Screen and this invokes a number of cross checks between data in
different screens.
The calculation can then be performed by clicking the calculate button.

Once the calculations are performed the results can be viewed by clicking the
View button. The results are categorised and can be selectively displayed by
checking a series of check boxes on the various Results Tab Pages. For further
details refer Chapter 3.
On the Printing Screen, the selected results from the other results screens are
accumulated ready for printing (refer clauses 5-20 to 5-70 for further details).
Tables of loads, air quantities etc. can also be (separately) viewed and printed
individually (refer clause 5-80 for further details).
If there are errors in the results, a different results screen appears where the
errors are detailed (refer 5-90 for further details).
Once the data is entered for a particular external wall or roof, the shadows that
the various shading devices cast on that particular wall or roof can be viewed by
clicking the camel shadow button. For further details refer clause 5-110.
With the calculations completed the AHU, zone and room loads, air quantities etc.
and room temperature, reheat etc. can be displayed graphically by selecting the
Graph button. For further details refer 5-100.
The psychrometrics for selected AHU’s may also be plotted. For further
details refer clause 5-120.
Once you have toured through the various screens you should be ready to enter
your own project. To do this select New Project from File on the Menu Bar on the
MAIN Screen and then enter your data. The data for each screen is described in
detail in the following clauses.

If you need further assistance of any sort you will find it of considerable
advantage to be a member of ACADS-BSG’s CLUB-BSG and then you can take
advantage of our comprehensive hot-line service. For further details contact the
ACADS-BSG Office in Glen Iris on (03) 9885 6586.
For further details of our comprehensive range of building services software visit
our web site at www.ozemail.com.au/~acadsbsg.
2-30 Main Screen
Fig 2-30A The Main Screen Menu and Tool Bar
The MAIN or First screen in CAMEL enables a user to open an existing or new
project, display a summary of the project, proceed to the Project or AHU, Zone
and Room data input Screens, perform the calculations and finally view and or
print the results. In addition the user can look at the shadows cast by shading
devices on any external wall, view a psychrometric plot of each AHU coil and view
graphics of the loads, air quantities etc.
The items in the pull down menus on the MAIN Screen are:
File
Open New Project
Open Existing Project
Append Project
Save Project
Save Project As
Project Defaults
Import Previous Configuration
List of 4 most recent files
View Input Data
Exit
Project -- takes the user to the Project Input Data Screens
AHU, Zone, Room -- takes the user to the AHU, Zone and Rooms input data
Screens
Summary -- takes the user to the Summary Screen
Calculate
View -- Viewing the results (refer clause 5-20) or Viewing the Calculation
Errors (refer clause 5-90)
Shadow -- takes the user to the Shadow Screen (refer clause 5-110)
Graph – takes the user to the Graph Screen (refer clause 5-100)
Psychrometrics – takes the user into the Psychrometrics plotting
(refer clause 5-120)
Configuration – (refer clause 2-50)
System
Colours
Help
Contents
Index
Tip of the Day
Overview
Program Features
Program Limitations
Getting Started
Entering Data
About

The buttons on the Toolbar are shown in Fig 2-30A and in order left to right are:
Exit
Open New Project
Save Project
Project Screens – refer clause 3-10

AHU, Zones and Rooms Screens – refer clause 4-10
Summary Screen – refer clause 2-60
Calculate – refer Chapter 3
View Results – refer Chapter 3
Shadow – refer clause 5-110
Graph – refer clause 5-100

Psychrometric Charts – refer clause 5-120
UPDATES – This opens a form which displays the list of updates to the
program to produce this version of the program.

Allows the user to open an existing project (file). When this is selected a file
selection box appears in which the title of the project and the number of air
handling units is displayed for the file highlighted.
Open New Project

Selecting Open New Project clears any existing data from the data base.
Append Project
This allows a user to append a previously saved input data file to the current
project. When selected the data in the file to be appended is added to each of the
screens and:
 any identical schedules, window and shading schemes and/or special walls
are merged and
 any schedules, window and shading schemes and/or special walls that are
different, but have the same title, are renamed
Both the data in the file to be appended, and the current data, must be free of
errors before the appending will be implemented.
Where there are any differences in the data on the Project screen and/or the
Chillers and Boilers Screens, the values in the current (base) data are used (the
values in the appended file being discarded) These differences can then be listed
by selecting the Append Messages button on the Summary Screen.
Save Project
Saves the existing data in a file with a name corresponding to the current CAMEL
data file. If current data has not been saved previously the user is prompted for a
new file name.
Save Project As
Displays a dialogue box enabling the user to select or enter the name of a file in
which the current input data in CAMEL will be saved.

Import Previous Configuration
When loading a new version of CAMEL, the items in the “Configuration” may be
different to what had been set in the previous version of the program. When
“Import Previous Configuration” is selected, the program prompts for the location
of the previous CamelCfg.mdb and then updates the values in the new version to
those in the selected configuration file.
View Input File

This displays the current input data file. At the top of the screen is a Menu Bar:
File
Open - opens another input data file.
Save - saves the data file. Changes can be made to the file manually but
this is not recommended as it is very error prone.
Exit - exits this screen
Search
Find - allows the user to find a character string in the file
Repeat Next F3 - repeats find
Options
Font - this allows the user to change the font so the file for viewing.
Calculate
This causes the calculations to be performed. The data however must first be
saved to a data file selected by the user. The actual calculation program is written
in FORTRAN.
View Results
Once the calculations are completed (or if there are errors) the program drops
into VIEW Screens where the Results can be selectively viewed and/or printed.
Refer Chapter 3 for details.
2-40 Setting Project Defaults

This menu item calls up a screen in which the user can set default values for a
range of items. Each time a user opens a new project, these values will be
inserted by default in the respective fields. This data is stored permanently and
will apply to any new project opened. This screen also allows the user to
determine which countries appear in the countries selection list on the Project Tab
page (refer to the end of this clause and fig. 2-40B).
Default data
The items for which defaults can be set are for items on the Project Tab Page and
the AHU Tab Page. The items are:
 Location
 Conditions - Comfort or Critical
 # Latitude
 # South or North
 # Elevation
 # Winter Design CDB
 # 8-18 or 24 Hr
 # Winter Design % RH
 # Daily Range C
 All Single Zone Single Room units
 Room Design Conditions (AHU Screen)
- Summer DB and Summer RH%
- Winter DB and Winter RH%
 Use AS1668-2012 Multiple Compartment Formula
 Minimum Leaving Coil Temperature
 Default Plant Operating Times

For the Storage Mass Calculator
 Glass Thickness (for Windows in the External Surfaces)
 The Factor for Walls and Windows (in the External Surfaces)
 The Factor for Roofs (in the External Surfaces)
 The Surface Density and Factor for Floors
 The Factor for Partitions
Once set these apply to all the storage mass calculator forms but can be
overridden for an individual Project (on any Storage Mass Calculator Form) or
individually for any space.
Fig 2-40A The Project Defaults Screen

The first ten and the minimum leaving coil temp and operating times are for the
Project Tab Page and are described in Clauses 3-20 and 3-30. The Room
Design Conditions and Use AS1668-2012 are described in clause 4-20 while the
Storage Calculator Defaults are described in clause 4-40.
# If a location is selected in the PROJECT DETAILS Tab Page values for these
five items are extracted from the CAMEL weather file MASTER.WEA. The
defaults only apply when the user elects to ‘Enter his/her own outdoor design
conditions’ and then three additional items are displayed in lieu of ‘Conditions’ on
the Project Details Tab Pages:
 Summer Design ºCDB - the 3pm Jan (July) Summer outdoor DB temp.
 Summer Design ºCWB - the 3pm Jan (July) Summer outdoor WB temp.
 Yearly Range ºC
These three values are then used to calculate the 3pm outdoor temperatures at
other months (rather than using the values from the MASTER.WEA file)
Locations in List Button

This button brings up a form (fig. 2-40B) that displays a list of countries where
climatic data is available and stored in CAMEL and allows the user to determine
those which appear on the country selection list on the Project Tab Page.
Locations in Selection List Form

This selection form displays the available countries and states of Australia where
climatic data is stored in the program. The user can select the desired locations
that are required to be included in the Location selection list (on the Project Tab
Page) by checking the appropriate selection boxes.

Fig. 2-40B Locations in selection List Form
2-50 The Configuration Screens
Fig 2-50A The Systems Configuration Screen

The Configuration drop down menu on the Menu Bar has two items:

The Systems Configuration
On this screen default drives and other system requirements are set. Once
selections are made the Apply button is clicked and then this configuration will be
saved permanently.
Input files directory

This is the directory where your input data files will be saved by default when you
save your data.
Output files directory

If Select is checked, this is the directory where your output (Results) files will be
saved by default after the calculations are performed. If Same as input is
checked the default output files directory is set to match the input file directory for
each particular run file.
Weather files directory

This is the default directory for any user weather files. These files comprise DB
and WB temperatures at each hour of a design day in each month and have to be
developed separately by the user. Now that an extensive range of weather
locations are readily available in CAMEL, users will rarely need this option.
Glass Data Files Directory

This is the directory where the Master Glass Data (BMWindow.txt file) and the
User Glass Data (BUWindow.txt file) reside. They are located in a separate
directory that is common to both CAMEL and BEAVER so that both programs
access the same file. If the user is not using BEAVER then these files may be
located in the main CAMEL directory
The Colours Configuration
Fig 2-50B The Colours Configuration Screen

In this screen certain colours under the control of the user can be set:
 Tables
This applies to the screens with tabular type input ie. Schedules, Shading,
Windows, Walls and Preconditioners on the Project Tab Pages, the AHU and
AHU-Coil Tab Pages when “Show All” is selected and for the Zones and
Rooms the External, Partitions and Internal Tab Pages. The settings available
are the background colour and the text colour for:
 Table - the main colour for the Tables
 Edit Cell - the colour for the current cell (where the cursor is located)
 Headings – the headings for the Tables
 Editing Style
This provides for three different styles for completely deleting items in a field
that have been entered.
When editing an item in a single field, the value in the field is highlighted when
it is first selected. It can then be deleted (1 mouse selection and 1 keystroke)
In the Grids there is a choice of:
 Cell border – when field is selected, the cell border is highlighted. The
next mouse selection highlights the background of the field and to delete
the item must then be swiped and deleted (4 mouse/keystrokes)
 Highlight Cell – when field is selected the background of the field is
highlighted and to delete the item must then be swiped and deleted (3
mouse/keystrokes)
 Floating Editor – when field is highlighted, the value in the field is
highlighted immediately and it can then be deleted (2 mouse/keystrokes):
With individual fields, or fields in a grid, if some of the digits or characters need
changing, it takes the same number of keystrokes.
 Diagrams
Picture background – the colour of the graphics window
Walls - the colour of the walls in the External Tab Pages
Windows - the colour of the windows in the External Tab Pages and the Shading
Tab Page
Shades - the colour of window or wall shades or shading surfaces from
Adjacent Shading. Reveals are always drawn as wire frame whilst
overhangs and drops are drawn solid if they are opaque and hatched
if they are partially transparent (factor greater than zero)
Shadow - the colour of the shadow cast on the building by the various shades
which can be viewed via the Camel Shadow button (clause 5-90).
Graphic - The default angle for the display of the external surface graphic may
be set by clicking and dragging with the mouse.
Adjacent Shading - The colour of the Adjacent Shading Graphic.
 Mandatory fields
Text and background - Text and background colour of the of the cells for items that
are mandatory.
2-60 The Summary Screen

This screen provides:-
 A line of 7 buttons which display the Project Screens status and
If the “All Single Zone/Room Units” check box on the Project Tab Page is:

Not Checked-
 A list of all AHU, zones and rooms entered with an indication of which Tab
Pages in each AHU have been entered under the headings:
AHU Title, AHU and Coil for each AHU and
Zone No, Room Title, Zone/Room, External, Partitions and Internal
for each zone/room.
Checked-
 A list of all AHU’s and zones entered with an indication of which Tab
Pages in each AHU have been entered under the headings:
AHU Title, AHU and Coil for each AHU and
Zone, External, Partitions and Internal for each zone.
Fig. 2-60A The Summary Screen
Fig. 2-60B The Summary Screen for Single Zone/Room Units.

A green smiley face indicates data for the particular Tab Page is present and is
valid. A red face indicates data is present but it is invalid or incomplete. No face
indicates that data has not been entered for this Tab Page. The user can go
directly into any of the Project or AHU, Zone or Room Tab Pages (e.g. to correct
any errors or make changes) by double clicking the particular smiley face.
The AHU and Zone/Room Title can be edited as can the Zone Number (when
present). When the zone number is edited however the zone numbers must

remain in sequence e.g. zone numbers 1, 2 and 3 can only be changed by
changing the 3 to 2 and then changing the 2’s to 1 from the last zone upwards.
And any more complicated renumbering should be done using the Move button.
At the top left is a Validation button. This performs a series of additional cross
checks zone to zone and zone to project data. The status is displayed in a
message line at the top of the screen. A green Project Valid is displayed if there
are no errors whilst a red Project not Valid is displayed if there are errors. A
yellow Project not Validated indicates that data has been changed but has not
been validated and you will need to press the validation button. When this is
done, if there are now no errors the button and status will turn green. If there are
still errors the button and status will remain red until any errors are corrected and
the validation button pressed again.
Any cross check errors that are found are displayed in a table on the foot of the
screen when the red face on the tool bar is clicked.
Display AHU’s, zones and rooms tree – refer clause 2-70

Help – Help on this screen.
Split into Single Zone Button

This splits all multi-zone Air Handling Units into separate single zone units. When
selected a Split Options form (Fig 2-60C) appears in which the user can select
between converting all the air handling units in accordance with the requirements
of the Deemed-to-satisfy JV2 provisions of the BCA2006 or leaving the AHU types
unchanged. For the ‘To BCA’ option, since in CAMEL the fuel type is not input, it
is assumed that if there is any AHU connected to a boiler then there is gas or oil
heating and thus:
Fig 2-60C Split Option Form

- If there is any AHU connected to a boiler, all AHUs are set to Single Zone H&C
Water Cooled and all AHUs are connected to a boiler
If there are no AHUs connected to a boiler, all AHUs are set to RC Heat Pump
Append Messages Button

This button appears on the Summary Screen if there are any Messages after an
existing saved CAMEL data file has been “Appended” (by selecting Append
Project under File on the Main Screen). The messages are listed in a form with
the value for the Base (Current) file and Appended File displayed. Once the file
with the appended data is saved, this button is no longer displayed.
Combine rooms button

This combines the Zones&Rooms, External, Partitions and Internal Data for all
rooms in each zone of multi-room AHU’s into a single room on that zone.
The Add, Delete and Move Buttons

Also on the Summary Screen, AHU’s, zones and rooms can be added, deleted or
moved. These are implemented by selection of the appropriate button at the foot
of the Screen.
Delete - deletes a Room or a complete AHU. The delete is carried out at the
current cursor position.

‘Add New’ AHU adds an AHU after the last AHU in the current project. When the
button is selected an ‘Add New AHU’ Form appears where existing data from
another AHU can be copied as the New AHU is created
Fig. 2-60D The ‘Add New AHU’ Form Fig. 2-60E The ‘Add New Room’ Form
‘Add New’ room, adds a new room in a nominated zone in a nominated AHU.
When the button is selected an Add New Room form appears where the
zone number can be nominated and existing data from another Room can be
copied as the New Room is created
With Move, a Move AHU, Move Zone or Move Room form appears on screen where the
user enters details of the source and destination of the move.
Move AHU
This allows the re-ordering of AHUs.
Fig 2-60F The ‘Move Zone’ Form Fig 2-60G The ‘Move Room’ Form
Move Zone (Fig 2-60F):

Move From
AHU - the AHU number in which the zone to be moved is currently located
Zone - the zone number of the zone being moved
Move To
AHU - the AHU to where the zone (including all rooms in this zone) is to be
moved.
A radio button to select whether the zone is to be moved Before, After or
Joined to the selected (referenced) zone shown to the right of these radio
buttons.
Zone - The zone number in the AHU referenced by the radio button selection.

Move Room (Fig 2-60G):
Move From
AHU - the AHU number in which the room to be moved is currently located
Zone - the Zone number in which the room to be moved is currently located
Room number being moved
Move To
AHU - AHU number to where the room is to be moved.
Zone - zone number to where the room is to be moved.
Radio button to select whether moved room is to be the first or last in the zone.
If the ‘All Single Zone/Room Units’ check box has been selected on the Project
Tab Page only AHUs’ can be added or deleted.
2-70 AHU’s, zones and rooms tree

Display Tree - the button to display AHU’s, zones and rooms tree is provided on
the Summary screen and on all the Ahu’s, Zones and Rooms screens.
Fig. 2-70A Display AHU’s, zones and rooms tree

This screen displays AHU’s, Zones and Rooms in Tree form with facility to Move,
Copy and Delete selected items (but NOTpreconditioners).
The left hand side displays the original tree when entering this screen. The right
hand side shows the new tree. AHU’s that are multi zone are coloured blue whilst
single zone systems(RCHP, Single Zone H&C, etc) are coloured black.
The items on the Menu Bar are:
Close – Closes the Tree Screen
Font – Allows the font type and size to be selected
Add – Adds an AHU, Zone or Room. The options available depends on the
current cursor location

Delete - Deletes the AHU, Zone or Room where the cursor is currently
located. The options available depends on the current cursor location.
Copy – Copies the AHU, Zone or Room where the cursor is currently located
to the clipboard
Paste – Pastes the AHU, Zone or Room in the clipboard to the AHU where
the cursor is currently located.
The items on the Tool Bar are:
For AHUs, Zones or Rooms:
Adds an AHU, Zone or Room. The Zone or Room is added where the
cursor is located.
Deletes the AHU, Zone or Room where the cursor is located.
Copies the AHU, Zone or Room where the cursor is located to the
clipboard.
Pastes the AHU, Zone or Room that is in the clipboard to the AHU where
the cursor is located. Note that you cannot add more than one zone to a
single zone AHU.
This adds a Return Air Room to the current AHU. The return air room is
added as the first room on the AHU under a label RET AIR instead of
ZONE
Note each AHU is only allowed one Return Air Room, however a Return Air
Room can be copied from one AHU to another the same way as a “normal”
room can, by right clicking the mouse and selecting copy/paste R.A.Room
Undo – Undoes the most recent change (add, delete, move, etc)
Redo – Redoes the most recent undo
Expands the Tree so all zones and rooms are displayed.
Collapses the tree so that only the air handling units are displayed.
Help – Help on this screen.
Mouse Functions
When the mouse is located on an AHU, Zone, RET AIR or Room:
Right clicking the mouse displays a selection list for the toolbar functions
described above. The items on the selection list depends on the cursor location,
eg with the cursor on an AHU, the list only allows Add, Delete or Copy an AHU or
Add a Zone.
Left clicking the mouse select the an AHU, Zone, RET AIR or Room and then
clicking and dragging will move the selected item.
Left clicking the expand/compress (plus/minus) symbol to the left of the AHU or
Zone Title, expands or compresses the tree.
The Add, Delete, Move, etc and corresponding Mouse functions do not apply to
Preconditioners
At the foot of the screen the system type is displayed for the AHU currently selected. In
front of the System Type is a Change button which displays a list of the available
systems types and allows the user to change the type of the current system.
Below this is two buttons:
Cancels all moves, deletes, copies, etc and returns the user to the
Main Screen
Applies all the changes and returns the user back to the Main Screen
where the new and/or rearranged items should now appear.

3 Entering Data – Project Screens
3-10 The Project Screens
In this screen general project information and information that is cross referenced
in the individual zones is entered on a series of tab pages (selected by tabs at the
top of the screen).
At the top of each of the project screens is a toolbar with the following functions:
Close and return to the MAIN Screen

Go to the AHU, Zone and Rooms Input Data Screens
Clears the column/row where the cursor is located (in tabular format
screens only). The items that are deleted on each tab page are:
Schedules The entire schedule (row)
Shading The entire shading scheme (column)
Windows The entire window (column)
Walls The entire wall (column)
Chiller & Boiler All values on this page
Preconditioner The entire preconditioner (row)
Copies the column of data where the cursor is into the clipboard (in tabular
format screens only). ie. Schedules, Shading, Windows and Walls Tab
Pages. Note the type or title is not copied as this must be unique.
Pastes the column of data in clipboard to the column where the cursor is (in
tabular format screens only). ie. Schedules, Shading, Windows and Walls
Tab Pages.
Validation - CAMEL validates all data as it is entered. When there are
errors this smiley face changes to red and if the user clicks on this face, all
current errors on this Tab Page will be displayed in a pop-up box at the foot
of the screen.
Displays a calculator
Help
Below this tool bar is a set of tabs which allows the user to drop into any desired
Project Tab Page:-
 Project
 Schedules
 Shading (schemes)
 Window (types)
 Wall (types)
 Chiller and Boiler
 Preconditioners (outside air)
These are now described in detail in the following clauses.

3-20 The Project Tab Page
On this tab page the Project Title, Location, Outdoor Design Conditions and other
project details are entered. Note that defaults for many of these items can be
entered on the Project Defaults screen accessed under File on the Menu Bar of
the main screen.
The items entered are:-
Project Title
Three lines for an appropriate title comprising letters or numbers, up to 45
characters in length each line.
All Single Zone/Room Units

This simplifies the data input screens when all Air Handling Units are single zone,
single room. A default can be set in the Project Defaults screen.
Comments
This allows the user to add comments which are listed in the Results under
Project Details. The comments form allows entry of any text from the keyboard.
Fig 3-20A The Project Tab Page When a Location is Selected.
Maps (See Clause 3-40)

To the left of the location drop down lists, when a location in Australia and New
Zealand (others will be included in future versions) is selected, a Maps button
appears. Selection of this button causes another screen to appear on which a
detailed map appears. Refer to the next clause 3-40.

Location # (See clause 3-30)
The weather location used to determine the hourly outside temperatures as well
as the latitude and elevation and therefore the hourly solar position and radiation.
The details of this entry and its alternatives are contained in clause 3-30.
Winter Warm Up %
For buildings with intermittently operated heating plants (e.g. office blocks) or with
dual temperature operation, additional heater or boiler capacity should be
provided if unduly long heating up periods are to be avoided. This Winter Warm
Up % is based on the winter outside to inside temperature. If left blank, the
default value shown in black is used. The details of how the default is calculated
and the modifications done during calculation are shown in clause 7-150.
Minimum Leaving Coil Temperature

This sets a minimum leaving coil temperature to apply to all AHU Coils. CAMEL
will use the value entered here or the value calculated using the by-pass factor
etc., whichever is higher (the default is 6.0 C). Typical values are 8.0 for a DX
system and 12.0 for a chilled water system. It ensures that an impractical low
value is not used and ensures that the psychrometrics are calculated if the room
sensible heat factor line misses the saturation curve. The default value can be set
in the Project Defaults Screen under File in the Main Screen (refer clause 2-40).
The number of times it is used is printed in the results.
The allowable range is 5 to 20.
Default Plant Operating Times

This is a default for the plant operating times for all air handling units which can
be overwritten for individual AHUs on the AHU Screen. It is the First and Last time
for the calculations within each design day entered via a slide bar.
From the values that apply to each AHU, the Hours of operation (12 16 or 24
hours) for the purposes of determining the storage load factors are established by
the program. (Refer 7-140 for technical discussion)
For the Chiller, the operating time is taken as the extremes of all AHU operating
times that are connected to it.
Building Rotation
Fig 3-20B Site Plan with Building Rotation Angle of –24°

The rotation of the north (Building Nth) wall of the building with respect to true
north in either hemisphere. Clock-wise positive. This allows the building to be
readily rotated without having to change the azimuth angle for every surface. The
value entered here is added to the surface azimuth angles entered on the
zone/room External (walls and roofs) Tab Page.
The allowable range is -360 to 360 degrees.
Ambient Design Conditions for Dessicant HCU's

If the project has a desiccant humidity control unit, the ambient design conditions
used to determine the required capacity (kW) and moisture removal (g/kg) to

maintain the room %RH are entered here. Normally this will be a day with a high
moisture level.
Design WB
This is the ambient design wet bulb for estimating the capacities and moisture
removal of the desiccant humidity control units entered in the current project (on
the Preconditioner Screen or the AHU screen for individual AHUs). This and the
Design %RH must be entered if there are any Desiccant HCUs in the current
project. Range – within 2 degrees C of the maximum monthly 3pm design WB for
the location entered.
Design %RH
This is the ambient design percentage RH for estimating the capacities and
moisture removal of the desiccant humidity control units entered in the current
project (on the Preconditioner Screen or the AHU screen for individual AHUs).
This and the Design WB must be entered if there are any Desiccant HCUs in the
current project. Range 60 to 90
Default Button
If this button is selected, default values are inserted for the desiccant humidity
control units Design WB and Design %RH bulb. The default values are the
maximum 3pm monthly design WB for the location entered and 80 for the %RH
Shading Effectiveness
In this panel check boxes that control how the Window Shading Effectiveness and
Equivalent Overhang are calculated may be selected.
The shading effectiveness for the windows on each surface is:
1- (the sum of the solar loads through the windows with shading)
(the sum of the solar loads through the windows with no shading)
over 24 hours for the three summer months (Dec, Jan, Feb in the Southern
Hemisphere and June, July, Aug in the Northern Hemisphere) expressed as a
percentage. Optionally, the program can also calculate the equivalent depth of an
overhang located at the top edge of the windows (with an extension to the left and
right the same as the overhang depth) that gives the same effectiveness as the
entered shading on each surface.
This, being based on load through the window, is an approximation to the
“percentage of summer solar radiation” in clause J2.5(b) of the BCA.
The window shading effectiveness results in CAMEL can therefore be used:
 To evaluate the effectiveness of a particular shading device
 To determine the equivalent overhang depth of the proposed shading
scheme(s) for entry into the BCA Glass Calculator to check compliance with
clause J2.5 (a), or
 After determining the required overhang depth for compliance with clause
J2.5 (a) using the BCA Glass Calculator, and then adjust the proposed
shading scheme(s) until the equivalent overhang depth from CAMEL is
achieved
 To ascertain if the shading effectiveness is greater than 80% for compliance
with clause J2.5 (b) of the BCA.
The checkbox items are:
 Shading Effectiveness –this invokes the shading effectiveness calculations
 Equivalent overhang – the program also calculates the equivalent overhang
depth
 Include Adjacent Shading – include any adjacent shading in the
calculations
 Disable Load Calcs- this causes only the shading effectiveness calculations
to be carried out, bypassing all the other load and psychrometric
calculations. This option is available because the calculation of the
equivalent overhang dimensions takes a considerably longer time.

3-30 Weather Location
The weather location used to determine the hourly outside temperatures as well
as the latitude and elevation and therefore the hourly solar position and radiation
may be selected directly for many Australian locations as well as several other
countries as detailed in the pull down list. Alternative entries allow the user to
define and / or re use previously entered monthly weather data or just enter 3 PM
summer design conditions all as described below.
Location #
This selects the data for the weather location to be used in the calculations.
Normally the Country or State is selected in the first list and the City or Town in
the second list. If it is known that the required location is not stored in the program
then the first three items of the first selection list may be used to enter alternative
weather data. The first three items of the first list comprises:
Enter 3pm Summer
User Defined Monthly
File
Details of entering weather data using these alternatives is detailed below (at the
end of this section) and shown in figs. 3-30A and B.
For locations for which the weather is stored in the program first select the
Country or Region or for Australia, the State or Territory from the first selection
list. (For South East Asia and the Pacific Islands the Country is in the second
selection list).
Australian Capital Territory to Western Australia - Australian States
China
New Zealand
Papua New Guinea
Pacific Islands - Vanuatu and the Solomon Islands
South East Asia - South East Asian Countries
Taiwan
Then select the city or town (or country) from the second selection list.
For locations in Capital Letters, the following data for the location selected is
displayed on the screen:-
 Monthly dry and wet bulb design temperatures used in the calculations and
depending on the design conditions (Comfort or Critical) selected.
 Latitude in degrees and Elevation metres.
 Winter design conditions – comfort only except for locations where 3 hourly
data is available in which case values for comfort and critical are available.
 Daily range (used to determine corrections to the 3PM summer design
temperatures at other hours of the day).
For locations in lower case lettering the same data is extracted except that:
 For New Zealand, the 3pm January outdoor summer temperatures and the
outdoor winter temperatures are the 1% or 2.5% values for summer cooling
and winter heating from the IHRACE Yearbook – 2006.
 For China and Taiwan the 3pm July outdoor dry and wet bulb temperatures
and the outdoor winter design temperatures are the outdoor design
temperatures for summer air conditioning and winter air conditioning from the
National Standard – Code for the Design of Heating, Ventilation and Air
Conditioning GBJ 19-87.
The yearly range is then used with the corrections from Table 3 of DA9 to
calculate the monthly 3pm temperatures (June, July and August (S) or Dec, Jan
and Feb (N) not available). The daily range is used to calculate the hourly
variations at other times to 3pm.
The latitude, elevation, winter design conditions and daily range may be

overridden by editing the values in the appropriate field.
AS an alternative to selecting the locations in the location lists the user can select
from the first three items of the first pull down list (Enter 3pm Summer, User
Defined Monthly or File). This alternative entry is detailed below (at the end of this
section) and shown in fig. 3-30A and B.
Design conditions based on climatic data before or after 1990

This is a selection for the years of climatic data that were used in determining the
ambient design conditions used by the program to calculate the cooling loads.
The selection is between “Prior to 1990” – used for all previous versions of
CAMEL up to Version 5.10.5 or “1990 to 2012/13”. For versions after 5.10.5
the design conditions have been recalculated using more recent climatic data.
The new data includes more locations but there are also locations where
recordings of climatic data has been discontinued and that is why the data
locations prior to 1990 have been retained in the program.
Years of climatic data used to calculate the design conditions

This is the actual range of years that the design conditions for the selected
location are based on.
The calculated design conditions does vary depending on the years of climatic
data used and there is no “correct” number of years that should be used. The
more years that are used the more “average” the values are. The less years used
the greater the possibility of specific hot or cold years or months increasing or
decreasing the calculated values.
Conditions
This allows the user to select between outdoor design conditions for Comfort or
for Critical process air conditioning.
If comfort conditions are chosen and a location is selected, the program uses the
lesser of the 3pm temperature not exceeded on 10 days per year (including one
standard deviation) and the monthly 3pm temperature not exceeded more than
once in two years (extracted from the MASTER.WEA file).
If critical conditions are chosen and a location is selected, the one day in 2 year
data is used for each month. For further discussion on this, refer Chapter 2 of
DA9.
Latitude #
The Latitude for the location. This value is extracted from the CAMEL weather file
(MASTER.WEA), but can be overwritten by the user. The allowable range is 0.0
to 50.0
South or North
A radio button to specify if the location is in the Southern or Northern Hemisphere.
Elevation
This is the elevation (in metres) of the building above sea level. By default (when
a location is selected) the program inserts the elevation of the Meteorological
Station where the temperature data was recorded. The elevation is used to
calculate the air density which affects the air quantities. The program also adds
2.3% per 1000m above sea level to the Peak Solar Heat gain figures which are
used by CAMEL to determine the solar heat gain through windows. Refer
footnote on Table 5, p25 of DA9 In addition CAMEL adjusts for the reduced air
density at higher elevations and this results in larger air flows to meet the same
cooling load.
Winter Design CDB #

Ambient Winter design dry bulb temperature. Only used when a heating load is
required. This value is either:

New Zealand
For locations where sufficient data is available (Lower case letters in list) –
the dry bulb temperature below which the temperature only occurs for 1% or
st st
2.5% of the time, (1 May to 31 October) depending on whether Comfort or
Critical is entered and for 8-18 hr or 24 hr operation.
For other locations (Capital letters in list) – the 8am dry bulb temperature that
is not exceeded on average on 10 days per year, ie the value for Comfort air
conditioning with no distinction for hours of operation.
China and Taiwan
The outdoor design temperature for winter air conditioning determined from:
Tw = 0.30 Tm + 0.70Td
where:
Tm = Mean temperature of normal coldest month
Td = Mean temperature of normal coldest day
All Other Locations
For locations where 3 hourly data is available – the dry bulb temperature
below which the temperature only occurs for .25% of the plant operating
hours, 8-18 or 24 hrs for Critical operation. For Comfort it is the 8am dry
bulb temperature that is not exceeded on average on 10 days per year, ie the
value for Comfort air conditioning with no distinction for hours of operation.
For all other locations– the 8am dry bulb temperature that is not exceeded on
average on 10 days per year, ie the value for Comfort air conditioning with no
distinction for hours of operation.
In all cases the value displayed can be overwritten. Range is -25.0 to 25.0 C.
8-18 hr to 24 hr
A radio button to allow selection of plant operating hours upon which the outdoor
heating design temperature is based. This only applies to locations where data is
available, viz.
 Most locations in New Zealand for Comfort or Critical applications.
 Some locations in Australia and other S.E.Asian countries but for Critical
applications only, namely those where hourly data is available.
Winter Design %RH #

Ambient Winter design % relative humidity. Only entered when humidifier heating
load is required. This value is extracted from the CAMEL weather file
MASTER.WEA, but can be overwritten by the user.
Typically this value is 80% - (Refer DA9, p9). The allowable range is 10 to 100%
Daily Range C #
This is the daily range which is the difference between the average daily
maximum and the average daily minimum dry bulb temperature in January (June
in the Northern Hemisphere). It is used in determining the hourly outdoor design
dry & wet bulb temperatures from the 3 pm design conditions (refer Table 2 in
DA9). This value is extracted from the CAMEL weather file, but can be overwritten
by the user. The allowable range is 5.0 to 30.0 C.
Alternative Entry of Outdoor Design Conditions

Alternatively to selecting an actual location in the locations list the user can select
from the pull down list any of the first three items:-
Enter 3pm Summer - Where the user can enter the summer design conditions
(including daily and yearly range) to be used - note that with this selection no
cooling load is produced for the winter three months (because the Carrier
monthly corrections do not provide for the winter months) and the entered

data only applies to this job, ie the data is not permanently stored for future
use in other runs of CAMEL. Further description appears below.
This option can be used where data such as in the ASHRAE Fundamentals
is available for locations, outside Australia for example. The yearly range is
then used with the corrections from Table 3 of DA9 to calculate the monthly
3pm temperatures.
User Defined Monthly - This option allows the user to enter and permanently
save dry and wet bulb 3pm design temperatures and the daily range for each
month for any location (Edit/Add button to the right) or to select data
previously entered in this format by selecting the required location from the
second selection list. The program then uses the daily range to generate
hourly temperature variations from the entered 3pm values. Such data may
include data available from ASHRAE on the Fundamentals Handbook CD.
Further description appears below.
File - Allows the user to prepare their own weather data file. This file must
contain the monthly and hourly design dry and wet bulb temperatures. It is
an alternative that can be used when the user wishes to enter their own
hourly Dry Bulb and Wet Bulb temperatures. The format of the file is
illustrated in Appendix F. The name of the user’s weather file is prompted for
when ‘Calculate’ is selected.
Enter 3pm Summer

When “Enter 3pm Summer” is selected the Tab Page shown in Fig 3-30A
appears, however the values remain from the previously selected town/city and
Fig. 3-30A A Section of The Project Tab Page When “Enter 3pm Summer” is Selected
may or may not be appropriate. The items of input are then:-
Description
This is a description or title of the weather location that is listed in the Results in
the Project Summary.
Summer Design CDB #

3 PM summer (January in the Southern Hemisphere, July in the Northern
Hemisphere) ambient dry bulb design temperature. The entered yearly range is
used to determine the values for other months.
The allowable range is 10.0 to 50.0 C
Summer Design CWB #

3 pm summer ambient wet bulb design temperature.

The allowable range is 10.0 to 50.0 C.
Yearly Range C #
The yearly temperature range usually taken as the difference between the 3 pm
summer design dry bulb temperature and the 8am winter dry bulb temperature. It
is used for estimating the shift in 3 pm temperatures month to month.
The allowable range is 0.0 to 68.0 C.
The other items, ( Latitude, Elevation, Winter Design DBC and RH and Daily
Range) must be entered by the user and are as described above in the Tab Page
where the location is selected.
User Defined Monthly

This option allows the user to enter dry and wet bulb 3pm design temperatures
and the daily range for each month for any location. The program then uses the
daily range to generate hourly temperature variations from the entered 3pm
values. Such data may include data available from ASHRAE. The data once
entered can also be stored for future reference.
The data for the selected location is displayed on screen but cannot be edited.
Data for a previously entered (and saved) location may be called up by selecting
from the second Location selection list.
The Edit/Add button displays the User Monthly Design Conditions form
where the user can edit and re-save the user entered design conditions data for
the selected location or add or delete a location
Fig. 3-30B A Section Of The Project Tab Page When “User Defined Monthly” is Selected
User Defined Monthly Design Conditions form

On this form User defined design conditions for any location can be entered
and/or edited. To assist with inputing data already saved locations can be copied
or load data for a CAMEL location which has design data permanently stored in
the program.
The Buttons on the Tool bar are:
Close - exits this screen

Save User Data - Saves the current data on screen for use in other CAMEL runs.
Delete Data - Deletes the currently selected location and data from the Users
Monthly Design Conditions file

Fig. 3-30C User Monthly Design Conditions Form
Add New Location - clears the current data ready to add data for a new location.
Once the data for this new location is entered it can be saved for future use
and/or Applied (transferred) to the Project Tab Page. If the Apply button is
selected without Saving, the data for this location will only be available for the
current CAMEL project.
Validate - Performs a data check turning red if there is any missing mandatory
items. Clicking on the red face will provide a list of the errors.
Help button for this form
After the data for a selected location has been edited, clicking this button will
transfer the data to the Project Tab Page.
Copy Data from selection list - allows

selection of an existing user defined location to copy data into the data fields
ready to modify and save as another location
Copy Data - copies the data for the location selected on the ‘Copy Data from’
selection list, into the fields on the User Monthly Design Conditions form.
To assist with inputing data, the user can load data for an existing CAMEL
location for which data is permanently stored in the program. Once a location is
selected, (either comfort or critical) the 3pm CDB, 3pm CWB and Daily Range
values are inserted in the table below by hitting the Copy data button to the right of
the selection list. The individual values can then be modified as required. For
details of the location selection list see 3-30 above.
Copy Data –Copies (inserts) the 3pm CDB, 3pm CWB and Daily Range values
for the selected CAMEL location into the table below. The individual values can
then be modified as required
The items of input data on this form are:
Location for Design Monthly Conditions

This is a location name to identify the set of monthly design conditions.
WMO
The World Meteorological Number for the particular location. This is optional data.

3pm CDB
The user defined ambient 3pm design dry bulb temperature for each month.
3pm CWB
The user defined ambient 3pm design wet bulb temperature for each month.
Daily Range
The user defined daily range for each month. This is used to generate a daily dry
and wet bulb temperature profile using the corrections from Table 2 of DA9.
Latitude
The latitude of the User defined location.
Winter Design CDB

The user defined 9am winter ambient design dry bulb temperature.
Winter Design RH
The user defined 9am winter ambient relative humidity.
3-40 The Map Screen

On this screen a map of Australia or New Zealand is displayed showing all the
locations where climatic data is available for CAMEL. When an Australian location
is selected on the Project Screen, a map of an area of Australia around the
selected location is displayed – The whole of Australia cannot be seen on one
map. Other maps may be added later.
The Mouse Operations
Zooming - Left and right clicking the mouse anywhere on the map (except on a
location name) causes the map to zoom in or out respectively. Alternatively the
Zoom Bar on the control panel can be used
Displaying the Design Conditions - If the cursor is moved to over a green
(before 1990) or red (after 1990) location name, the Critical January or annual
Comfort design dry bulb and wet bulb temperature (depending on the Radio
Button selected) are displayed as a Tool Tip to enable easy comparison with other
locations or comparison of the pre-1990 versus after 1990 data..
Selecting a Location - If the mouse is right clicked on a location name, this
location name is displayed together with the monthly design dry and wet bulb
temperature in the control panel on the left of the screen. The colour of the
location name is changed to blue (NZ red) to indicate that it is the current selected
location. Selecting Apply will then return to the Project Screen with this selected
location.
The map also moves such that the selected location is at the centre of the screen.
Panning – The mouse can be used to pan the map by clicking and dragging the
left button.
The Control Panel for the Map
On the left of the screen is a control panel with:
 A zoom bar to zoom the viewing window (left and right mouse click will also
zoom).
 On the Australian map a series of check boxes to enable roads, railway lines,
rivers, lakes, mountains (contours), towns, and/or urban areas to be displayed
on the map. On the NZ map two check boxes which allow the weather location
dots and text to be displayed or not.
 On the Australian map two radio buttons to select between the locations
where design conditions are based on climatic data recordings prior to 1990
and after and including 1990.

Fig. 3-40A The Map Screen showing Bairnsdale Victoria
 A drop down list for selecting a particular location. On this list typing a letter
finds the next location starting with that letter. When a location is selected the
program scrolls this to the centre of the viewing window. For Australia the list
contains the locations according to whether before or after 1990 has been
selected.
 A check box for Comfort or Critical conditions to be displayed.
 The monthly 3pm dry bulb and wet bulb design temperatures.
 Close – closes the map screen without changing the current location selected
on the Project Screen.
 Help – Help on this screen.
 Apply - closes the map screen changing the current location selected on the
Project Screen to that currently selected in the Map Screen.
 Three check boxes (Australia Only) to display either:-
Before 1990 the locations where the design conditions are based on
climatic data prior to 1990,
After 1990 the locations where the design conditions are based on
climatic data after and including 1990,
ASHRAE the locations where ASHRAE have design conditions
available.
The Before and After 1990 monthly design conditions are stored in the
program. If the cursor is left on any location name on the map, the
January (Comfort or Critical) design conditions will be displayed in a tool
tip. Right clicking the mouse will cause the location to be selected in the
selection list where the design conditions for each month can be viewed.
 The ASHRAE design conditions are not available in the program and must be
obtained from ASHRAE (on CD) and entered under the Location “user Defined
Monthly” on the Project Tab page. Once entered these can be stored for future
use to save having to re-enter the data.

3-50 The Schedules Tab Page
These are schedules for people, lights and equipment loads (sensible, latent or
steam). They are cross referenced from the internal loads tab page where any
schedule can be applied to any load. A schedule is not required for any load that
is on during all of the plant operating hours. (Refer Fig 3-50A)
In the centre portion of the Tab Page the profiles are entered as percentage of full
load at the various times on a 24 hour clock throughout the day.
The plant operating hours are indicated by the red bar, and in the calculations
CAMEL ignores any values outside this time.
In the top portion of the Tab Page a graphic of the current schedule is displayed.
In the lower portion of the Tab Page profiles can be stored for future use. To do
this the cursor is set on the required schedule in the middle of the Tab Page, the
number of the stored profile (from 1 to 6) is selected from the drop down list and
then the Store Profile button is pressed.
Fig 3-50A The Schedules Tab Page

To use a stored profile place the cursor on the row where the particular schedule
is to be inserted and then click on one of the six stored profiles in the lower
portion of the Tab Page.
Schedules can also be copied and pasted or deleted using the toolbar buttons.

3-60 The Shading Tab Page
Shading devices comprising any combination of overhang, overhang drop and/or
reveals are entered here and referred to in any zone (in the External Tab Page) by
its scheme title. Shading schemes are applied to any entered external wall
(surface) and/or any window, or group of windows on that surface by reference to
the appropriate shading scheme title. For example a wall can have an overhang
(or shading scheme) as well as a window in that wall having another different
shading scheme. The program calculates the combined effects of both shading
schemes on both the wall and the windows in the wall. Refer also to the figures in
clause 7-90.
Each shading device is treated as a surface with zero thickness. The convention
for shading dimensions is as viewed from the outside looking in.
To help the user get the dimensions of the shades correct, a graphical display is
provided for each shading scheme. It can be rotated in 3D by clicking and
dragging the mouse over a particular graphic. This is not drawn to scale (because
each shading scheme can be applied to different windows) but indicates if for
example a reveal is to the left or to the right of the window edge.
Under Preview the user can selectively turn on the display of the:-
 Overhangs
 Reveals
 Transparent (wire frame) reveals and overhangs or solid, except if the relevant
factor has been entered they are shown hatched.
The colours, as displayed on the Tab Page, of the windows and shades
Fig 3-60A The Shading Scheme Tab Page

(overhangs and reveals) can be set under ‘Configuration’ on the MAIN Screen
Menu Bar.
A row of windows on a surface can be entered as a series of individual windows
or as a group and thought should be given to the best way of modelling the
shading if overhangs project either side of each individual window (if they are
spaced) or outside each end (if they are continuous).
Note that in this Tab Page the = sign causes the next non blank field to the left to
be copied into the field where the cursor is currently located. Copy and paste can
also be used to copy from one shading scheme (column) to another.
CAMEL provides for up to 99 shading schemes.
Clause 7-90 of this User Guide describes how the shading calculations are
performed in CAMEL.
If the column number for a particular shading scheme is selected with the mouse,
a Shading Useage Form (Fig. 3-60D) appears displaying the AHU, Zone and
Room title together with the External surface number and exposure of each
surface that has this shading scheme on the window or wall.
Following is a description of each item on the Shading Tab Page. Note all
dimensions are in mm.
Scheme Title
A unique shading scheme identifier consisting of any 10 letters or numbers used
to identify the shading scheme. This is cross referenced in the External Tab Page
for each zone where the selected SCHEME is applied to a particular wall, roof or
window. It is advisable to use a meaningful descriptor preferably not associated
with an orientation (e.g. OVERHANGA, REVEAL1, rather than S1, S2 etc.),
especially if there are a large number of shading schemes in a particular job.
OVERHANG
Fig 3-60B Overhang Dimensions

Depth
The depth of the overhang from the edge nearest to the wall or window along the
overhang to the edge furtherest away from the wall or window.
Distance
The distance, parallel to the wall or window, from the top of the wall or window to
the inner edge of the overhang.
Left Side
The distance the rear edge overhang projects past the left side of the surface or
window. If infinite in length enter 99999.
Right Side
The distance the rear edge overhang projects past the right side of the surface or
window. If infinite in length enter 99999.

Gap
The perpendicular distance from the plane of the wall or window to the inner edge
of the overhang. Default, blank no gap.
Factor
The transmission factor for the overhang ie. solar gain transmitted divided by the
incident solar gain: 1.0 = totally transparent Default = 0.0 (opaque). This can
only be entered if an overhang depth is entered.
DROP
Drop Depth
The distance from the outer edge of the overhang to the bottom edge of the
overhang drop panel. A negative drop turns it into an upstand.
Drop Factor
The transmission factor for the drop panel ie. solar gain transmitted divided by the
incident solar gain: 1.0 = totally transparent Default = 0.0 (opaque). A negative
drop and a negative distance allows for modelling of balconies. (Refer Fig. 7-90C)
Fig 3-60C Reveal Dimensions

LEFT REVEAL
A Reveal (or Fin) is any projection on the left hand side of the window. Left is
when facing the window from the outside.
Depth
The depth of the reveal from the edge nearest to the wall or window along the
reveal to the edge furtherest away from the wall or window.
Distance
The distance, parallel to the wall or window, between the inner edge of the reveal
and the edge of the wall or window.
Gap
The perpendicular distance from the plane of the wall or window to the inner edge
of the reveal. Default, blank no gap
Top
The distance the reveal projects above the top of the surface or window. If infinite
in length enter 99999. If negative, the reveal will finish below the top of the
window but it must not finish below the bottom of the reveal.
Bottom
The distance the bottom of the reveal is above the bottom of the surface or the
window (or below if negative).

Factor
The transmission factor for the reveal if partially transparent i.e. solar gain
transmitted divided by the incident solar gain. 1.0 = totally transparent Default =
0.0 (opaque). This can only be entered if a reveal depth is entered. [0.0 to 1.0]
RIGHT REVEAL - As for LEFT REVEAL
ROTATIONS
Overhang
This is the angle of the overhang from the normal to the wall or window positive
upwards rotation. (default 0.0 – horizontal) [-90 to +90]
Drop
This is the angle of the drop to the overhang, positive outwards eg. 90 deg is
parallel to and in line with the overhang. (default 0.0 – at right angles to the
overhang) [-90 to +180]
Left Reveal
This is the angle of the left reveal about the axis formed by the height of the wall
or window to the normal to the wall or window. eg 45 deg is splayed outwards to
the left when looking at the surface (default 0.0 – projecting normal to the external
surface) [-90 to +90]
Right Reveal
This is the angle of the right reveal about the axis formed by the height of the wall
or window to the normal to the wall or window. eg 45 deg is splayed outwards to
the right when looking at the surface (default 0.0 – projecting normal to the
external surface) [-90 to +90]
Usage of Shading
This form appears when the column number for a particular Shading Scheme in
the Shading Screen is selected with the mouse. It displays a list of the external
surface numbers in each room where the selected shading scheme is used on
windows and/or walls.
Fig 3-60D Usage of Shading Form

3-70 The Windows Tab Page
Fig 3-70A The Windows (type) Tab Page

On this Tab Page each different window (or skylight) type is entered, such that it
can be cross referenced by its type on any external surface on any zone (in the
External Tab Page). If there are a number of windows that abut each other it is
usually preferable to enter them collectively as a single window. For each window
all of the first seven items must be entered.
Below this is optional input, when the user wishes to use stored information about
different glass types to establish the U value and Shade Factor to be used. The
Glass No is also used in BEAVER. The user can then use this data to help
determine an appropriate U value and Shade Factor to be used in the
calculations. Right clicking the mouse on the Glass No. displays a selection of
“standard” glass types and user defined glass types with properties that are stored
in the program.
CAMEL will handle up to 99 window types
be copied into the field where the cursor is currently located.
Copy and paste can also be used to copy from one column to another.
If the column number for a particular window is selected with the mouse, a
Window Useage Form (Fig. 3-70B) appears displaying AHU, Zone and Room title
together with the External surface number and exposure of each surface that
contains this Window
The dew point and altitude (elevation) correction is computed automatically by the
program. (AIRAH Application Manual DA9, Table 5)
Following is a description of each item on this Tab Page.
Type #
Up to 10 characters to identify the window type eg. SINGL for a single glazed
window. This is cross referenced in the External Tab Page of each zone where
one or a number of any one window type can be specified in a particular wall or if
it is a skylight in a particular roof.
Height #
Height of window (including frame) in mm.
Width #
Width of window (or block of windows) including frame in mm.

U-value #
Overall summer heat transmission coefficient (W/m² °C ) - U value of the window
including the frame. U values for the winter heating loads are computed from
the summer values. Typical values from the AIRAH Application Manual DA9,
Table 36 (U-values for Windows and Skylights) are:-
Air Space U Value

Single - 5.89
Double 5 3.35
Double 10 3.15
Double 15 2.97
Double 20-100 2.89
Horizontal - 4.88
Horizontal 5 2.84
These values are however, generic clear glass values, and are not representative
of the wide range of glass types that are now available.
Alternatively the U-value for specific glass types can be obtained from the glass
manufacturer but be aware that glass manufacturers generally quote the U-value
based on the (ASHRAE) NFRC winter conditions which are not appropriate for
cooling load calculations. (see below)
Note also that these U values are Centre of Glass values (ie they ignore the
frame) and may need adjustment to allow for the frame. The total window U value
can be obtained by running the LBNL WINDOW 5 or the U Value of a particular
window including the frame can be approximated by applying the adjustment
factors in the tables included in the section below titled Frame U Value Correction
to the Centre of Glass values.
Alternatively, if a Glass No is selected and a Frame U value correction is entered
and then either of the U values displayed below the Glass No is double clicked,
the program multiplies this U value by the entered correction factor to give the
total window U value on row 4 and this value is then used by CAMEL.
These Glass Nos. reference a number of commonly available and user defined
glass types that are stored in the program with the glass manufacturers NFRC U-
value listed together with a suggested summer U-value for use in CAMEL (and for
compatibility with the ACADS-BSG energy simulation program BEAVER which
also uses these glass types).
These suggested U-values were calculated using the LBL WINDOW 5.2 program
using the following environmental conditions in the AIRAH Application Manual
DA9:
Inside air velocity 1.0 m/s
2
Outside Convection Coefficient 19.7 W/m .K corresponding to a wind velocity of
2.5m/s in the table on page 38 of DA9
and the following additional assumed conditions required by the WINDOW 5.2 program:
Inside air and effective room temperature 24 deg C
Effective Room and sky Emissivity 1.00
Outside air temperature 35.0 deg C
Effective sky temperature 35.0 deg C
2
Direct Solar Radiation 783.0 W/ m
Note however that these U values are Centre of Glass values (ie they ignore the
frame) and may need adjustment to allow for the frame.
[0.001 to 100.0]
NFRC U-value and Shade Coefficient.
The NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council in Maryland USA) conditions are
reference values used by glass manufacturers for comparing glass types and

when listing their glass properties. They are also used in the LBL WINDOW 5
program where properties of glasses and windows can be calculated.
There are two sets of NFRC conditions one for summer and one for winter. For
CAMEL the entered U-value and Shade Coefficient are assumed to be at the
conditions at the time of peak load – generally taken as the summer design
conditions. The standard NFRC figures generally quoted by the glass
manufacturers are the winter conditions for the U-value and the summer
conditions for the shade coefficient.
The main factors that differ from the generally used DA9 values as used in
CAMEL are:-
Summer Winter DA9
Outside Temperature C 32 -17.8 Not Stated
Inside Temperature C 24 21 24
Outside Wind Velocity m/s 2.8 5.5 2.5
Inside Air Velocity m/s 0.0 0.0 1.0
The most significant variable is the inside wind speed can only be estimated by
the user.
The appropriate U-value and Shade coefficient that should be used depend on
the prevailing conditions at the building site on the particular facade at each hour
of the design day as well as the inside air movement. It is more than possible that
the standard NFRC U-value and Shade coefficient (and indeed those from DA9)
bare little resemblance to the conditions prevailing at the actual window site.
Shade Factor #
Overall shade factor for solar gain through glass. When there are internal
venetians or curtains on the window, this is the Shade Factor for the glass
multiplied by the Interior Solar Attenuation Factor (refer ASHRAE Fundamentals
2005 p31.47). Typical values of approximate overall solar factor with and without
internal venetians, extracted from the AIRAH Application Manual DA9 Table 18
are:
No Inside Blinds
Shade Light Med Dark
Reference Glass (3mm clear) 1.00 0.56 0.65 0.75
Plate glass (6mm clear) 0.94 0.56 0.65 0.74
Heat Absorbing Glass
40-48% absorbing 0.80 0.56 0.62 0.72
48-56% absorbing 0.73 0.53 0.59 0.62
56-70% absorbing 0.62 0.51 0.54 0.56
Actual values of Shade Coefficient for the glass being used should be obtained
from the manufacturer (if possible) or calculated since they can vary greatly for
apparently similar glasses. They are a function of the Glass to Window area and
the type of frame.
If the user selects a Shade Coefficient from the lower panel (under Glass No) on
the Windows Screen, these values are Centre of Glass values and should be
adjusted accordingly via the Frame Shade Factor Correction
Be aware that the NFRC conditions (used by manufacturers and available in the
WINDOW5 program) are reference conditions and are not necessarily the
conditions used for design.(see above)
The allowable range is 0.0 to 1.5
Frame S. Fact Correction

A correction factor to the shade factor for the window frame. If the entered Shade
Factor is based on the Centre of Glass value then a correction factor should be
applied to allow for the type of window frame and the area of the frame. If the
entered Shade Factor includes an allowance for the frame then the Frame Shade
Factor Correction should be entered as 1.0
The WINDOW5 program from the LBNL (Lawrence Berkley National

Laboratories) can be used to calculate the shade coefficient for the window
without the frame (Centre of Glass value) or with the frame. The suggested
Shade Coefficients that are displayed in CAMEL when the Glass Number is
selected are the Centre of Glass values. In CAMEL then the full area of the
window can be entered and the calculated shade coefficient including the
particular frame can be entered with a Sash Correction of 1.0 or alternatively the
centre of glass values can be used and a correction for the frame made via the
Frame Shade Factor Correction.
The storage load factors used in the Carrier method have inbuilt, a correction for
wooden frames assuming that the actual glass area is approximately 85% of the
entered window or sash area. (p38 of DA9). Hence if the glass area is 85% of the
sash area and the frames are wooden or similar low U value, then the Sash
correction is 1.0 (corresponding to a frame to Glass U value ratio of 0.4 for single
glazing and 0.5 to 1.0 for double glazing in the table below).
For other than wooden or low U value frames, the shade Coefficient varies with
the glass to sash area ratio AND the conductivity of the frame such that when the
U value of the frame is much higher than the glass the Shade Coefficient for the
window approaches the Centre of Glass value divided by 0.85. The following
tables (derived from results of the WINDOW5 program for a range of glass
types), provide typical Frame Shade Factor Corrections for the Centre of Glass
values.
% Glass U value of Frame / Centre of Glass U value
Area 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
95 1.09 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17
90 1.05 1.07 1.08 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.14 1.15 1.17
80 0.93 0.96 0.99 1.02 1.05 1.07 1.10 1.13 1.16
70 0.81 0.85 0.90 0.94 0.98 1.03 1.07 1.11 1.15
60 0.60 0.67 0.74 0.80 0.87 0.94 1.00 1.07 1.14
Table of Typical Frame Shade Factor Corrections for Single Glazed Windows
Area 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
95 1.13 1.15 1.18 1.21 1.25 1.28 1.31
90 1.09 1.11 1.15 1.19 1.22 1.26 1.30
80 0.94 0.97 1.03 1.08 1.14 1.20 1.26
70 0.82 0.86 0.94 1.02 1.11 1.19 1.27
60 0.61 0.67 0.80 0.92 1.05 1.17 1.29
Table of Typical Frame Shade Factor Corrections for Double Glazed Windows
2
Typical frame U Values (W/m C) (from WINDOW5) are:
ASHRAE Wood 2.27
ASHRAE Aluminium Flush 3.97
ASHRAE Aluminium with break 5.68
ASHRAE Aluminium with no break 10.79
In Australia, no break frames are usually used by window frame suppliers so that
the correction factors at the right hand end of the above table usually apply.
[0.0 to 2.0]
Internal Shading #
Used to indicate whether the window has internal blinds or curtains or not. This is
used in determining the storage load factors for the glass. It determines how
much of the solar gain that penetrates the window is a convective load and how
much is absorbed by the building structure and emerges as a delayed heat load.
Refer Table 10 p 30 of DA9. A value is not required for skylights.
Glass Number
This is the glass number from a standard list of glass types or a list of user
defined glass types in CAMEL. Right clicking with the mouse displays the Glass

Selection form where the user can select either a standard glass number or a
User Defined glass number.(Refer Clause 3-70) With the standard list, the NFRC
winter U value and NFRC summer Shading Coefficient (manufacturers data) and
suggested U values and Shading Coefficients for use in CAMEL are displayed.
Provision is also made for users to add glass types to enable the U value and
Shading Coefficient for these to also be stored.
These standard and user defined glass types are also used by BEAVER the
ACADS-BSG building energy simulation program where more detailed information
about the glass properties is required
U Value for BEAVER

For the selected Glass Number, this is the NFRC Winter U-Value if the Glass No
has been selected from the Master Glass Types or the user entered U-Value
(entered in BEAVER) if it has been selected from the User Data Glass Types.
Double left clicking the mouse inserts the displayed value multiplied by the frame
U value correction (if entered) into the U-Value field in the upper panel
U Value for CAMEL

For the selected Glass Number, this is a suggested U-Value if the Glass No has
been selected from the Master Glass Types or a user entered U Value if it has
been selected from the User Data Glass Types. Double left clicking the mouse
inserts the displayed value multiplied by the frame U value correction (if entered)
into the U Value field in the upper panel.
Shade Coefficient for BEAVER

For the selected Glass Number, this is the NFRC Summer Shade Coefficient if
the Glass No. has been selected from the Master Glass Types or the user
entered Shade Coefficient (entered in BEAVER) if it has been selected from the
User Data Glass Types. Double left clicking the mouse inserts the displayed
value multiplied by the Interior Solar Attenuation Coefficient into the Shade Factor
field in the upper panel.
Shade Coefficient for CAMEL

For the selected Glass Number, this is a suggested Shade Coefficient if the Glass
No has been selected from the Master Glass Types or a user entered Shade
Coefficient if it has been selected from the User Data Glass Types. Double left
clicking the mouse inserts the displayed value multiplied by the Int Solar Att Coeff.
into the Shade Factor field in the upper panel.
Interior Solar Attenuation Coefficient

Note a value may only be entered if the Internal Shading for this window has been
set to YES. The interior solar attenuation coefficient represents the effect of the
inside shading device only. A value of zero indicates the device is completely
opaque and 1.0 (the default) indicates no shading device is present. It is a
function of the glass type. For further information refer ASHRAE Fundamentals
2005 p31.47. If a value is entered here and a glass number has been entered,
when the right mouse is clicked on either the NFRC winter Shade Coefficient or
the Shade Coefficient for CAMEL a value equal to the selected glass shade
coefficient x the interior solar attenuation coefficient is inserted in the Shade
Factor. [0.0 to 1.0]
Frame U Value Correction

The window U value (on the fourth row) should include the effect of the frame.
The Frame U Value Correction is a correction to the U value (to allow for the
effect of the window frame) when applying the value listed below the Glass
Number.
Once a Glass Number is selected a U Value for BEAVER and a U Value for
CAMEL is displayed. Double clicking the left mouse button on either of these
values will insert the selected U value multiplied by the Frame U Value Correction
(default 1.0) into the field on the fourth row. This value is then used in the

calculations by CAMEL.
Explanation of Frame U Value Correction
When obtaining data from a glass manufacturer, they will usually quote the winter
U value in accordance with the ASHRAE NFRC reference conditions which is not
necessarily the figure you use for design. What is required for CAMEL is the U
value for summer based on typical design conditions. The glass manufacturers
should be able to give you the centre of glass NFRC summer value but this needs
to be modified to reflect the design conditions (eg. those quoted in DA9) and also
the effect of the frame. To do this you can run the LBNL WINDOW5 program.
Alternatively you can select a Glass Number and then select the corresponding
"suggested U value for CAMEL" (which is based on the AIRAH DA9
environmental conditions) and then enter a frame correction from the table below.
Then if you double click on the U value for CAMEL, the program multiplies this
value by the entered Frame correction and inserts the resultant value under U-
value on the fourth row. This value is then used in the calculations.
Area 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
95 0.95 0.97 0.98 1.00 1.01 1.03 1.04 1.06 1.07
90 0.93 0.95 0.97 0.99 1.01 1.04 1.06 1.08 1.10
80 0.86 0.90 0.95 0.99 1.03 1.08 1.12 1.17 1.21
70 0.79 0.85 0.92 0.98 1.04 1.10 1.17 1.23 1.29
60 0.67 0.77 0.87 0.96 1.06 1.16 1.26 1.35 1.45
Table of Typical U value Correction for Single Glazing

Area 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
95 0.98 1.00 1.04 1.08 1.12 1.16 1.20
90 1.03 1.06 1.12 1.19 1.25 1.32 1.38
80 1.01 1.11 1.31 1.51 1.70 1.90 2.10
70 1.01 1.16 1.46 1.75 2.05 2.35 2.64
60 0.92 1.17 1.65 2.14 2.62 3.11 3.60
Table of Typical U value Corrections for Double Glazing
Hence when the frame U value is equal to the Centre of Glass U value then the
window U value is virtually unaltered for single glazing and only increased for
smaller double glazed windows. However if a frame with a high U value is used
the U value can be up to 45% higher for a single glazed small window and more
than trebled for a double glazed small window with a large frame.
2
Typical frame U Values (W/m C) (from WINDOW5) are:
ASHRAE Wood 2.27
ASHRAE Aluminium Flush 3.97
ASHRAE` Aluminium with break 5.68
ASHRAE Aluminium with no break 10.79
In Australia, no break frames are usually used by window frame suppliers so that
the correction factors at the right hand end of the above table usually apply.
Modified Storage Load Factors

Checking this checkbox causes the program to use a modified method for
calculating the solar gain through windows and skylights when shadows from
overhangs, reveals and adjacent buildings pass across the window and/or wall
during the course of the day. The method is described in detail in clause 7-80 of
this User Guide.

Usage of Windows
This form appears when the column number for a particular window in the
Windows Screen is selected with the mouse. It displays the AHU, Zone and
Room title together with the External surface number and exposure of each
surface that has this shading scheme on the window or wall.
Fig 3-70B Usage of Windows Form
3-80 Glass Selection Form
Fig 3-80A Glass Selection Form

In this form a standard list of commonly available glass types and a list of user
entered glass types are available for selection for the purpose of establishing an
appropriate value of U value and Shading Factor for input on the Windows
screen. Both lists are also available in BEAVER the ACADS-BSG Building Energy
simulation program. The data files where this data is stored is in a common sub-
directory (refer Clause 2-50). For CAMEL the U value and Shading Coefficient of
the glass is required. For BEAVER additional, more detailed information on the
solar transmission and absorption coefficients at varying angles of incidence is
required this data being entered for the user entered glasses, in BEAVER.
The Master Data

In the upper panel the standard list of glasses are displayed. The specific buttons
on the Tool Bar for this panel are:

Apply - inserts the selected glass number and data into the Windows
Tab Page
A selection list by Manufacturer and a selection button for number of panes.
The data for the standard glasses cannot be edited and comprises:
Glass No.
Glass Description
A description of the glass type
Number of panes
The number of panes in the glass type - 1(single) or 2 (double)
Manufacturer
Glass Manufacturer Name
NFRC (Winter) U value
This is the U value of the glass based on the NFRC (National Fenestration Rating
Council) reference winter conditions. It is input in BEAVER and modified each
hour based on the outdoor wind speed. It is also the value used in the ABCB
Glass Calculator. but is not an appropriate value for cooling load calculations and
is displayed for information only. The NFRC conditions for the winter U value are:
Inside wind speed 0.0 m/s
Outside air and effective sky temperature -18.0 deg C
Direct Solar Radiation 0.0 W/sq.m.
Outside wind speed 5.5 m/s (Convection Coeff 26.0 W/m2.K)
NFRC (Summer) Shade Coefficient

This is the Shade Coefficient of the glass based on the ASHRAE NFRC summer
conditions. It is input in BEAVER and also the value used in the ABCB Glass
Calculator. The NFRC conditions for the summer Shade Coefficient are:
Inside wind speed 0.0 m/s
Outside air and effective sky temperature 32.0 deg C
Outside wind speed 2.8 m/s (Convection Coeff 15.0 W/m2.K)
U value for CAMEL

This is a suggested U value of the glass for use in CAMEL based on wind speeds
similar to those listed in the AIRAH Application Manual DA9 and assumed typical
ambient and indoor temperatures. The values were calculated using the LBNL
WINDOW5 program with the following environmental conditions:
Fixed combined inside convective coefficient of 8.0 corresponding to an indoor air
velocity of 1.0 m/s
Outside air and effective sky temperature 32.0 deg C
Outside Wind Velocity of 2.5 m/s
These values are “centre of glass” U values and may need adjusting via the
Frame U value Correction to allow for the effect of the frame.
Shade Coefficient for CAMEL
This is a suggested Shade Coefficient of the glass for use in CAMEL based on
wind speeds similar to those listed in the AIRAH Application Manual DA9 and
assumed typical ambient and indoor temperatures. The values were calculated
using the LBL WINDOW5 program with the same environmental conditions as for

U-value for CAMEL listed above.
These values are “centre of glass” shade coefficients and may need adjusting via
the Frame Shade Factor Correction to allow for the effect of the frame.
The User Data

In the lower panel the user glasses are displayed. The specific buttons on the
Tool Bar for this panel are:
Apply - inserts the selected glass number and data into the Windows Tab
Page
This saves all the current user defined glass types (in the BUWindow.txt file) for
future use in other CAMEL (and BEAVER) projects. The location of this file is in a
separate directory that is accessible by both CAMEL and BEAVER and is
nominated in the Configuration>Systems
Deletes a selected user glass. This can only be done if the particular glass does
not have the additional glass properties for use in BEAVER ie the glasses that
have been entered for use in CAMEL only.
Adds a new glass type
A selection list by Manufacturer
If data for a particular glass type has been entered in BEAVER and is complete,
then only the last two columns can be edited these being the values required by
CAMEL but not BEAVER.
Otherwise the Description, Number of Panes and the Manufacturer can also
be edited with the Description being mandatory and the CAMEL values if entered
will be stored for this and for future CAMEL runs.
When a glass type is selected and Applied, the glass number and the last four
properties are inserted in the lower panel in the Windows screen
The data for the user glasses comprises:
Glass No.
Glass Number assigned by the program (starts from 500)
Glass Description
A description of the glass type
Number of panes
The number of panes in the glass type - 1(single) or 2 (double)
Manufacturer
Glass Manufacturer Name
Beaver U value
This is the U value of the glass based on the NFRC winter conditions if this is an
existing glass type entered by the user in BEAVER. It is not editable.
If the glass type is added in CAMEL as a new glass type it is optional data which
can be entered here but if this window type is to be used in BEAVER then the
user will need to obtain the NFRC U value and other glass properties required by
BEAVER and enter this data in the equivalent form in BEAVER
Beaver Shade Coefficient

This is the Shade Coefficient of the glass based on the NFRC summer conditions
if this is an existing glass type entered by the user in BEAVER. It is not editable.
If the glass type is added in CAMEL as a new glass type it is optional data which
can be entered here but if this window type is to be used in BEAVER then the
user will need to obtain the NFRC Shade Coefficient and other glass properties

required by BEAVER and enter this data in the equivalent form in BEAVER
User U Value for CAMEL

This is the U Value of the user entered glass for use in CAMEL. It will more than
likely be different to the ASHRAE NFRC Shading Coefficient which is the value
normally supplied by the glass manufacturer (and used in Beaver).
The NFRC conditions are reference conditions as distinct from design conditions
for use in load estimation. The values for CAMEL are typically based on
conditions listed in the AIRAH Application Manual DA9, the main difference
between the NFRC conditions and those listed in DA9 being the inside and
outside wind speed.
User Shade Coefficient for CAMEL

This is the Shade Coefficient of the user entered glass for use in CAMEL.
Although similar, it will more than likely be different to the ASHRAE NFRC
Shading Coefficient which is the value normally supplied by the glass
manufacturer (and used in Beaver).
The NFRC conditions are reference conditions as distinct from design conditions
for use in load estimation. The values for CAMEL are typically based on
conditions listed in the AIRAH Application Manual DA9.
3-90 The Walls Tab Page

In each room each wall (or roof) with its associated windows (or skylights) is
entered as an external surface in the External (Walls and Roofs) Tab Page. The
wall or roof types used in each zone is selected from either a standard list
(referenced as W1, W2 etc for walls or R1, R2 etc for roofs) or by wall type as
entered here in the WALLS Tab Page. The standard list, (included as Appendix
D), is contained in the CAMEL.WAR file supplied with the program. It
corresponds to the list of walls and roofs used in the building energy simulation
computer program BEAVER. Up to 16 wall types can be entered.
If only walls or roofs from this standard list are to be used then:-
(a) no entries are required in this Tab Page
(b) the users CAMEL input data will be compatible with the BEAVER building
energy estimation program input data.
Note that the BEAVER MASTER.R data must be added to when using
BEAVER if different U values are entered in CAMEL.
Fig 3-90A The Walls Tab Page

If the user enters a wall or roof type in this Tab Page the same as one from the
standard list, then the wall or roof entered in this Tab Page is used in preference
to the standard list.
The walls and roofs in the standard list can be viewed from this Tab Page by
clicking the appropriate button in the selection box in the upper half of the Tab
Page.
be copied into the field where the cursor is currently located.
Copy and paste can also be used to copy one column to another.
Following is a description of each item on this Tab Page:-
Wall Type #
Up to 5 characters to identify the wall or roof type eg. TRIPB for a triple brick wall.
This is cross referenced in the External (Walls and Roofs) Tab Page of each
room where any of the wall or roof types entered here can be specified in a
particular wall or roof. Note that the wall type is case sensitive ie. W1 is different
to w1. If an identifier of one of the walls (W1 to W130) or roofs (R1 to R59) in the
standard list is used, this will take precedence over the one in the standard list.
U-Value #
Overall summer heat transmission coefficient in W/m C. Typical values are
2
given in Table 24 to 36 of DA9.

Winter U values for heating are computed from the summer values – see 7-10
Heating and Cooling Loads for more details
Surface density #
2
Wall or roof surface density (kg/m ). Program assumes upper or lower limit if the
density is specified outside the range in Table 21 p.60 of DA9. Note for roof in
sun or roof in shade, the allowable range is extended down to 10.0 if the Light
Weight Roof ETD’s check box is checked. (See Table 37 in DA9 for densities for
a range of materials.)
Light Weight Roof ETD’s

When this checkbox is checked, the program uses Effective Temperature
Differences (ETD's) developed by ACADS-BSG for sunlit and shaded roofs.
2
These extend the Carrier data down to surface densities of 10 kg/m ; the Carrier
2 2
data only going down to 50 kg/m at 40 latitude and 100 kg/ m elsewhere. If the
box is unchecked is omitted, the original Carrier data is used.
The method of determining these revised ETD’s is described in detail in clause 7-
70 of this User Guide.
3-100 The Chillers, Boilers and Circuits Tab Page

On this Tab Page the additional heat losses and gains in the piping circuits of the
chiller and boiler are entered. For the Chiller a diversity on the internal loads can
be entered to exclude a portion of these loads when accumulating the cooling
loads for the chiller.
Also circuits can be set up for accumulating loads for a group air handling units. The
connection to each particular circuit is made on the AHU screen.
The items of input are:
Chiller
Pump
The units for the pump heat gains to the chilled water; kW or % of sum of the
AHU cooling loads connected to the chiller.
Value – the kW or percentage in accordance with the units selected. The allowable range
is 0 to 10% or 0 to 99999 kW.

Fig 3-100A The Chillers, Boilers & Circuits Tab Page
Pipe Heat Gains

The units for the pipe heat gains to the chilled water; kW or % of sum of the AHU
cooling loads connected to the chiller.
Value – the kW or percentage in accordance with the units selected. The allowable range
is 0 to 10% or 0 to 99999 kW.
Diversity Factors
People Diversity Factor

This is a diversity factor entered as a fraction that is applied to the people when
the accumulated loads for the chiller are determined. The fraction is the fraction
of the people sensible and latent load that is included in the chiller load.
Lights Diversity Factor

the accumulated loads for the chiller are determined. The fraction is the fraction of
the lighting load that is included in the chiller load.
Equipment Sensible Diversity Factor

the equipment sensible load that is included in the chiller load.
Equipment Latent Diversity Factor

the equipment latent load that is included in the chiller load.

Boiler
Pump
The units for the pump heat gain to hot water; kW or % of the sum of the AHU
heating loads to the boiler.
Value - the kW or percentage in accordance with the units selected. The allowable range
is 0 to 10% or 0 to 99999 kW.
Note that the pump heat reduces the required boiler capacity.
Pipe Heat Losses

The units for the pipe heat losses from the boiler hot water pipes, kW or % of the
sum of the AHU heating loads connected to the boiler.
Value - the kW or percentage in accordance with the units selected. The allowable range
is 0 to 10% or 0 to 99999 kW.
Refrigerant / Water Circuit Accumulation
CAMEL provides for the accumulation of the loads (GTH) for nominated groups of
air handling plants for the purpose of sizing condenser plant, variable refrigerant
flow (VRF) systems, etc. The circuits are set up here with the Title and
accumulation required. The assignment of AHUs to the particular circuit is done
on the AHU screen.
Circuit Description
This is the description of each Circuit
Circuit Type
This is a selection list for the type of circuit. The options available and the AHU
System types that can be connected to each circuit type are:
 Condenser Water Loop - all system types except RCHP, VRF Indoor
Units and Evaporative Cooling but on each condenser water loop the
system types must be the same
 Variable Refrigerant – Only VRF indoor units allowed
 Water Loop Heat Pump - RCHP only
 Chilled Water Fan Coil - Single Zone Heating and Cooling
 Blank (no circuit type) - all system types except Evap Cooling
All AHUs on a circuit must be the same type except when the circuit type is blank.
This is primarily used when loading CAMEL into BEAVER, the ACADS-BSG
energy simulation program, to determine which system type to use in BEAVER
and how the data is extracted from the CAMEL results.
The Condenser Water Loop is for packaged air conditioning units with water
cooled condensers connected to a common condenser water loop cooled by a
common cooling tower. Note: only the TOTAL cooling GTH is calculated NOT the
total heat rejected to the cooling tower.
The Chilled Water Fan Coil circuit can be used for fan coil units connected to a
chiller with heating coils connected to the boiler or electric. It can also be used for
modelling chilled beams with or without the AHUs connected to a Preconditioner
which preconditions the outside (primary) air. Another use is to split the total
chiller load into a number of sub-circuits each with a separate pump.
No. Off
Number of similar circuits (including this one) to be included in BEAVER data to
calculate the total energy usage. This entry has no effect on CAMEL results.

3-110 Preconditioners Tab Page
On this Tab Page the details of any outside air preconditioner plants are entered.
These are separate air handlers that precondition the outside air before being
distributed to selected zones.
The type of Preconditioner can be:
 Temperature Controlled (Cooling Coil and/or Heating coil) with or without an
outside to exhaust air heat exchanger on the outside air inlet to the unit
 Humidity Controlled (Desiccant Wheel) with or without an outside to exhaust
air heat exchanger on the outside air inlet to the unit. Refer 7-40
Psychrometrics - Desiccant Humidity Control Unit for description of how the
HCU is modelled.
 An outside to exhaust air heat exchanger only
The Air Handling Units that are connected to the preconditioner can be nominated
on this Tab Page (as from AHU m to n) or individually on each AHU Tab Page.
The condition of the outside air supplied to each connected AHU is then the
leaving conditions for the particular preconditioner as entered on this Tab Page.
Preconditioners can be copied (from one row to another) using the copy and
paste buttons on the toolbar.
Fig 3-110A The Outside Air Preconditioner Tab Page

The items that are entered on the PRECONDITIONER Tab Page are:-
Preconditioner Title
An appropriate title comprising letters or numbers, up to 20 characters in length
for each preconditioner plant.
Temperature Controlled
Leaving Dry Bulb Temperature #
The preconditioned plant Leaving Dry Bulb Temperature (C) when the pre-
conditioner cooling coil is operating.
Note that this is the temperature of the air leaving the plant NOT the
preconditioner coil (that is it includes any rise due to a draw through fan).

Allowable range is 0 to 40.
Leaving Wet Bulb Temperature

The preconditioned plant Leaving Wet Bulb Temperature (°C) when the pre-
conditioner cooling coil is operating.
If the leaving wet bulb temperature is not entered the preconditioner cooling coil is
assumed to extract sensible heat only unless the leaving dry bulb is less than or
equal to the dry bulb temperature corresponding to the ambient moisture level
(g/kg) and 95% RH. The leaving coil condition is then taken as the entered
leaving dry bulb temperature and 95% RH. [Allowable range 5 to 40]
Connected To Chiller
This indicates whether the Temperature Controlled Preconditioner is connected to
the chiller. If not, it is treated as a package unit and the cooling coil load is not
added to the chiller load.
Heating Leaving Dry Bulb Temperature

The preconditioner plant Leaving Dry Bulb Temperature (°C) when the heating
coil is operating. Note that this is the temperature of the air leaving the plant NOT
the preconditioner coil (that is it includes any rise due to a draw through fan).
[Range 10 to 40]
Connected to Boiler
This indicates whether the Temperature Controlled Preconditioner is connected to
the boiler. If not connected to the boiler, it is treated as a packaged unit and the
heating coil load is not added to the boiler load
Humidity Controlled
Precool CW/DX
This nominates whether the pre-cooling coil for the desiccant humidity control unit
is a DX (refrigerant) or Chilled Water coil. This is also the flag to indicate that a
desiccant humidity control unit is being installed for this Preconditioner. Refer 7-40
Psychrometrics - Desiccant Humidity CU for details of how the HCU is modelled.
Select
This provides for entry of the DX cooling coil capacity (when the pre-cooling coil
is Chilled Water) and/or the moisture removal at the Design conditions (entered
on the Project Screen) for a selected desiccant humidity control unit. It enables a
re-run of CAMEL with the actual DX cooling coil capacity and/or the actual
moisture removal of a selected humidity control unit for a particular
manufacturer’s unit so that the capacity of the main AHU and chilled water pre-
cooling coil (if it is a CW coil) can be more accurately estimated.
Note that the methodology for sizing the desiccant humidity control unit is based
on data and information supplied by Munters Pty Ltd which may not apply to other
manufacturers units
DX Capacity kW
The actual capacity of the DX unit heating the de-activation air of the desiccant
wheel and providing cooling and dehumidification of the outside air. This is to
provide for a re-run of CAMEL with a selected HCU. If left blank the program
estimates the moisture removal at design conditions.
This is assumed to remain constant at all outdoor air conditions with the unit

cycling at part load conditions with a lower load than the capacity of the DX Coil.
[Range 0 to 99999]
Moist Rem. g/kg

The actual moisture removal (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel for a selected Humidity
Control Unit at the entered design conditions (as entered on the Project Screen).
This is to provide for a re-run of CAMEL with a selected HCU. If left blank the
program estimates the moisture removal at design conditions.
The entered or estimated value is varied at other outdoor air conditions as a
function of the ambient DB, WB and Specific Humidity and the Specific Humidity
of the air leaving the HCU.
Refer 7-40 Psychrometrics - Desiccant Humidity Control Unit for description of
how the HCU is modelled. [Range 0 to 10]
Fan Details - all types
Fan kW
The preconditioner Fan kW. If the fan is blow through the fan kW is added as a
load on the preconditioner plant. If it is draw through the fan load is not added, as
the fan heat increases the temperature of the preconditioned air i.e. the leaving
coil temperature from the preconditioner is the leaving plant (entered by the user)
minus the temperature rise due to the fan kW.
Fan type
The fan kW is added as a load on the preconditioner plant. For a Humidity
controlled unit, the fan is always draw through. With a blow through fan the
temperature rise due to the fan heat is added to the ambient temperature of the
air entering the unit. For a draw through fan the temperature rise due to the fan
heat is:-
Temperature controlled, subtracted from the user entered leaving unit
temperature to determine the required coil leaving temp.
Humidity controlled, added to the calculated leaving temperature of the
desiccant wheel
Fresh to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger

Temperature and Latent or Enthalpy efficiency
Temperature and Latent or Enthalpy efficiency of an outside air to exhaust air
heat exchanger, expressed as a decimal, where the exhaust air passing through
the heat exchanger, is the sum of the supply air minus return air for each AHU
connected to the preconditioner. It is assumed that the efficiency does not vary
with change in outdoor conditions. Temperature efficiency only may be entered, or
temperature together with latent or enthalpy efficiency.
The fresh to exhaust air heat exchanger is assumed to be at the entry into the
humidity controlled or temperature controlled unit.
When a Fresh to Exhaust Air heat exchanger is included, all the return duct gains
are applied to the return air before portion or all of it is passed through the heat
exchanger so that a corresponding proportion of these heat gains will be
exhausted
Refer clause 7-30 of the User Guide for a detailed description of how a fresh to
exhaust air heat exchanger is modelled in CAMEL. [0.0 to 1.0]

4 Entering Data – AHU Screens
4-10 The AHU, Zones and Rooms Screen
On this screen the detailed AHU, Zone and Room information is entered for each
AHU on a series of Tab Pages.
Fig 4-10A The main toolbar on the AHU, Zones and Rooms Screen
At the top of each screen is a toolbar with the following functions:
Close and return to the MAIN Screen
Go to the Project Screens

Delete - This button deletes the data for the particular row, column or item
where the cursor is currently located. The items that are deleted on each
tab page are:
AHU The entire Air Handling Unit OR when Show All is checked,
deletes the AHU where the cursor is currently located. When
it is selected a small form appears on screen with the
message “Are you sure you want to delete AHU ‘n’ including
all connected Zones and Rooms”
External Deletes the data (column or with Show All the row) where the
cursor is located. If the cursor is on a surface, the surface and
any additional windows attached to this surface will be deleted.
If the cursor is on an additional window, only the additional
window will be deleted
Partitions Only the Floor, Ceiling or Partition (column or with Show All,
block) where the cursor is located.
Partitions Only the row (or with Show All, the block – people or lights or
sensible etc) where the cursor is located.
Copies the column of data in show single, or block of data in show all,
where the cursor is, into the clipboard (External and Partitions Tab Pages
only). If the cursor is on a surface, the surface and any additional windows
attached to this surface will be copied. If the cursor is on an additional
window, only the additional window will be copied.
Pastes the data in the clipboard to the column in show single, or block of
data in show all, where the cursor is (External and Partitions Tab Pages
only). The copy and paste from the External and Partitions Tab Pages can
be from one room to another. On the external Tab Page additional paste
options may be selected on the Paste External form which will appear –
see the end of clause 4-50 External Walls & Roofs Tab Page.
Validation - CAMEL validates all data as it is entered. When there are
errors this smiley face changes to red and if the user clicks on this face, all
current errors on this Tab Page will be displayed in a pop-up form at the
foot of the screen.
Displays a calculator.
Display AHU's, zones and rooms tree – Refer clause 2-70

This allows the user to copy the data from another AHU or room tab page
into the current AHU or room tab page. When the Copy button is selected,
a dialogue box appears for the user to select the AHU or room to be
copied. Refer Fig 4-10B.
Fig 4-10B Copy Dialogue Box
Global Change – this allows the user to globally change items (except combo
boxes and selection boxes) on the AHU, Zone & Room Screens. First the
global change check box is checked and then the cursor is located on the
field to be changed. The right mouse button is next clicked and in the
dialogue box that appears on screen, the number of occurrences of the
current value in the field is displayed. The replacement value is entered and
clicking OK will implement the change. The global change check box clears
after each change is implemented.
Fig 4-10C Global Change Dialogue Box
Help
Show All / Show Single

 If this button is selected the input data for all AHUs on the AHU,s or AHU
Coil Tab Pages and all AHUs and Zones and Rooms on the Zones &
Rooms, External, Partitions and Internal Tab Pages is displayed row by row
in tabular form.
 In this mode on the External screen additional surfaces are added
immediately after the cursor position by selecting the Add Surfaces button
which appears when Show All is selected.
 On the Internal Tab page, additional People or additional Lights are added
by selecting the Add People or Add Lights button (which appear when
Show All is selected) which insert another line immediately after the cursor
position.
 In Show All mode the right Mouse symbol is displayed above the
respective input column that it applies to, and moving the cursor to a field
below the symbol and right clicking, displays specific selection forms to
help the user with inputting data. On the Internal Tab Page, above the
Load column, the mouse only appears when the cursor is on the first
People row and for the Sens row. For People, an Occupancy Selection
form (to AS1668 or BCA Tab D 1.13) appears, whilst for Sensible, a
Sensible Load Calculator appears.

Go To – This is a selection list for the user to quickly go to another
AHU or room (Refer Fig 4-10D and E)
Fig 4-10D Go to AHU Selection List
Fig 4-10E Go to Room Selection List
Fig 4-10F The second Toolbar on the AHU, Zones and Rooms Screens.
Below this first toolbar is a second toolbar (refer Fig 4-10F) with the following
functions:
A description of the AHU including the number and AHU Title
A pair of buttons to toggle back and forth through the AHU’s
Add a new AHU – Adds a new AHU at the end of the current list.
Alternatively AHU’s can be added or deleted in the Summary Screen
When add AHU is selected the dialogue box shown in Fig 4-10G appears
and the AHU data from an existing AHU can be copied including the zones
and rooms on that AHU if the check box is checked.

Fig 4-10G Add AHU Dialogue Box
Fig 4-10H Second Toolbar with Extra Functions for Zones and Rooms Tab
Pages
In the Rooms Tab Pages (Zones and Rooms, External, Partitions and Internal)
extra items are added to this second toolbar (unless the Simplified Input for
single zone units only is selected on the Project Tab Page) as follows:
A Description of the Zone/Room including the Zone Number and Room Title
A pair of buttons to toggle back and forth through the rooms
Add a new Room and/or Zone – This adds a new room in the current AHU.
If it is the first room in this AHU it will be the first Zone. When additional
rooms are added they can be added to the current zone or added as
additional zones. When the Add button is selected a Form (as shown in Fig
4-10I) appears in which the user can select the AHU and Zone Number to
which the room is to be attached, can copy the data from another room and
can enter a new room title.
Fig 4-10I Create Room Dialogue Box
These are now described in detail in the following clauses.

Return Air Room
Adds a Return Air Room to the current AHU by opening a dialogue box
see fig 4-10J
This is a "room" such as a corridor or foyer (with its own fabric and internal loads),
that is a return air path back to the AHU. When selected a "Create Return Air
Room Form" appears where any other room can be copied into the R.A.Room
and a title given to the R.A.Room. See Fig 4-10J below. The rooms that feed
their return air into the "R.A. Room" are nominated on a "Connected to Ret. Air
Room" checkbox on the Zones and Rooms Tab Page. Note that there can only be
one Return Air Room on each AHU

Fig 4-10J Create Return Air Room Dialogue Box
This form appears whenever the +RA Room button is selected to create a Return
Air Room either on the Zones and Rooms tab Page or in the "tree".
The user may enter a title for the new R.A. Room and may copy all the data from
any other existing room via a selection list. If copied, all the Zone and Rooms,
External, Partitions and Internal Data are copied into the R.A.Room, except the
Outside Air, the Minimum Supply Air and the Thermostat Location, which are not
allowed to be entered in a R.A.Room.
AHU, Zone and Room Tab Pages

The individual AHU, Zone and Room Tab Pages are:
 AHU
 AHU - Coil
 Zones and Rooms (or Zone for Single Zone Units Input)
 External (walls and roofs in each room)
 Partitions (in each room)
 Internal (loads in each room)
4-20 The AHU Tab Page

This and the next Tab Page is where the information about each AHU is entered.
To the right hand side of the main panel a small panel displays the zones and
rooms that have been entered for this AHU. This is not displayed when ‘All Single
Zone/Room Units’ is selected on the Projects Tab Page.
The items on the first AHU Tab Page are:-
AHU Title
An appropriate title comprising letters or numbers, up to 20 characters in length
for the AHU unit.
Number off
Total number of similar AHU’s. This includes to all zones in the AHU.
System Type #
A selection of system type from
C V Zone Reheat * - Multi-zone Constant Volume with zone reheat.
Single Zone H & C - Single Zone with Central heating and cooling coil.
C V Face/Bypass * - Constant Volume with zone face and bypass dampers.
VAV No Reheat * - Variable Volume with a VAV box serving each zone.
VAV With Reheat * - VAV box with reheat serving each zone.
R C Heat Pump - Reverse Cycle Heat Pump serving a single zone.
VRF Indoor Unit - Indoor Fan Coil unit for a variable refrigerant system.
Evap Cooling - Evaporative cooler serving a single zone.

Fig 4-20A The AHU Tab Page.
Fig 4-20B The AHU Tab Page with Show All

*Cooling Systems marked with an asterisk are not available with the Single
Zone/Room Units Input (entered on the Project Tab Page)
This selection determines how the psychrometrics and air quantities are
calculated. For a description of this refer Clause 7-40.
Note that Single Zone H & C, Reverse Cycle Heat Pump and Evaporative Cooling
Systems can only have one zone but can have multiple rooms.
 With Reset (only available for systems with reheat).

This determines whether the estimate of reheat each hour is to be based on:
 With Reset not checked - the design (fixed) leaving dry bulb at the time of
Peak Grand Total Heat, entered or calculated, OR
 With Reset checked - the leaving coil temperature required at each hour by
the zone with the maximum load (most demanding space).
 Indirect (only available for evaporative cooling systems).

Checking this checkbox indicates that the system is an indirect Evaporative
Cooler and further details are entered on the AHU Coil Tab Page (see 4-30).
Connected to
This indicates whether the AHU is connected to the chiller, the Boiler or a
common water or refrigerant Circuit. Circuits provide for accumulating loads for a
group of air handling units. For example for a condensing unit for VRF or VRV
systems serving a number of fan coil units or a group of AHUs with a common

water cooled condenser.
The refrigerant or water circuit that can be selected needs to have been defined
on the Chillers and Boilers Screen. Detailed losses etc. for chillers and boilers
are also defined on the Chillers and Boilers Screen.
If connected to Chiller is selected, the AHU cooling coil load is added to the
Chiller load
If connected to Boiler is selected, the AHU heating load is added to the Boiler
load
If connected to a specific Circuit is selected, then the hourly cooling loads are
accumulated on the selected circuit (along with the hourly cooling loads of all
other AHUs connected to this circuit). Right clicking the mouse displays the
Circuits from the Chillers, Boilers & Circuits screen (Refer Fig 3-100A)
All AHUs on a circuit must be the same type and VRF Indoor Units must be
connected to a (VRF) circuit. Evaporative coolers cannot be connected to a
Circuit.
If the circuit type is:
 Condenser Water Loop then Connected to Chiller cannot be selected but any
of the AHUs on the circuit can be connected to Boiler. This circuit cannot
have RCHP systems connected.
 Variable Refrigerant then Connected to Boiler/Chiller cannot be selected as
the loads are applied to an outdoor VRF unit and this circuit can only have
Indoor VRF units connected.
 Water Loop Heat Pump then Connected to Boiler/Chiller cannot be selected
and this circuit can only have RCHPs connected.
 Chilled Water Fan Coil then Connected to Chiller is automatically selected
and each AHU can be connected to the Boiler. This circuit can only have
Single Zone Heating and Cooling systems connected.
If none of the check boxes are selected, the unit is assumed to be a separate
packaged unit and the cooling and heating loads are not accumulated.
Room Design Conditions (Defaults may be set in Project Defaults refer 2-40)
Room Summer Design DB #
Summer room design dry bulb temperature typically 24C. Applies to all
zones/rooms in this AHU. (Refer to pp.17 to 20 of DA9). Allowable range is 10.0
to 50.0C.
Room Summer Design RH #

Summer room design relative humidity typically 50%. Applies to all zones/rooms
in this AHU. (Refer pp.17 to 20 of DA9). Allowable range is 10.0 to 100.0%.
Room Winter Design DB

Winter room design dry bulb temperature C typically 21C. Applies to all
zones/rooms in this AHU. (See page 17 to 20 of DA9). If entered, Winter CDB
must also be entered in the 'Outdoor Design Conditions' on the Project Tab Page.
Allowable range is 10.0 to 50.0C.
Room Winter Design RH

Winter room design relative humidity typically 30%. Applies to all zones/rooms in
this AHU. (See page 17 to 20 of DA9). If entered, Winter RH% must also be
entered in the 'Outdoor Design Conditions' on the Project Tab Page. This value is
used to calculate the heat required for humidification. Allowable range is 10 to
100%.
Operating Times (Default may be set on the Project Tab Page)
This is the first and last hour of the period that the calculations for each design
day are to be made for this AHU.
From the first and last hour entered, the Hours of operation (12, 16 or 24 hours),

for the purposes of determining the storage load factors for windows are
established by the program. Refer Clause 7-140 for technical details.
If the value is left blank the program uses the default from the Project Tab Page
which is displayed to the right of the input field (Show Single) and above the
column (Show All)
For the Chiller and each entered Circuit, the operating time is taken as the
extremes of the operating times of all AHU that are connected to the chiller or a
particular circuit.
First Last
This is the first and last hour (24 hour clock) of the period that the calculations for
each design day are to be made. [ 1 – 24]
AHU Outside air (not applicable to Evap Cooling)

Use AS1668-2012 Multiple Compartment Formula
This indicates whether the room outside air quantities entered as L/S/person or
with any other units for each room are to be converted to an AHU % outside air
using the AS1668-2012 Multiple Compartment formula. If YES is selected, then
outside air quantities are entered at Room level only. If NO is selected then
outside air quantities can be entered at Room or AHU level.
Units
Units for outside air quantity at AHU level which may be selected from:-
% Supply Air (0.0 to 100)
Fixed L/s (>0)
Enter in Rooms.
If the last item is selected the outside air is entered in the individual rooms. If
either of the first two are selected, then the outside air cannot be entered for
individual rooms. (refer clause 4-40)
Value
Value of the outside air quantity according to the units selected in the outside air
units drop down list. Refer pp.94 and 95 of DA9 and AS 1668.2.
Careful thought should be given to return duct gains when entering a large outside
air proportion, as this may lead to low return air quantities absorbing relatively
high return duct gains, producing unrealistic high return air temperatures.
Allowable ranges are listed under units above.
This Outside air Panel is not present on this Tab Page when ‘All Single
Zone/Room Units’ is selected, % Supply Air being added to the Outside air
Selection list on the Zone Tab Page.
 Direct to Room
This check box is checked when the outside air is delivered directly to the room.
In this situation the outside air will normally be conditioned by a separate plant
modelled in CAMEL by connecting the AHU to a Pre-conditioner, normally a
temperature controlled Pre-conditioner but CAMEL does allow it to be a humidity
controlled Pre-conditioner. If the AHU is not connected to a Pre-conditioner then
the direct outside air is injected into the room unconditioned.
The air quantities for each space are entered on the Zones and Rooms Tab
AHU Heating Air Quantities (Evap. Cooling only)

Heating Supply Air (Units and Value)
This is the supply air for the evap cooling system when in heating. The selection
list is for the units of supply air quantity and may be selected from:
Same as Cooling

Air Changes / hour [>0 to 25.0]
Fixed air quantity in L/s [>0.0]

L/s per m2 of floor area [>0 to 10.0]
If the supply air for heating is left blank then program uses cooling supply air
quantity. If no supply air when heating (eg, for radiant heating) select any units
and enter a value of zero
Heating Outside Air (Units and Value)

This is the outside air for the evap. cooling system when in heating. The selection
list is for the units for outside air quantity and may be selected from:
Same as Cooling
Air Changes / hour [>0 to 25.0]
Fixed air quantity in L/s [>0.0]
L/s per m2 of floor area [>0 to 10.0]
% of Heating Supply Air [>0 to 60.0]
L/s per person [>0 to 20.0]
If the outside air for heating is left blank then program uses cooling outside air
quantity. If no outside air when heating select any units and enter a value of zero
Heat Exchanger (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)

Temperature & Latent or Enthalpy Efficiency
Temperature and Latent or Enthalpy efficiency of an outside air to exhaust air
heat exchanger, expressed as a decimal. It is assumed that exhaust air
temperature is the same as the return air temperature and the efficiency does not
vary with change in outdoor conditions. Both temperature and latent or enthalpy
efficiency or temperature efficiency only may be entered.
In applying all return duct gains the program assumes that all exhaust air (ie.
supply air - return air) occurs from the room except when a outside/exhaust air
heat exchanger is used. If the resultant return air quantity is too low, unrealistic
return duct temperatures can occur.
Refer clause 7-30 of this User Guide for a detailed description of how a outside to
exhaust air heat exchanger is modelled in CAMEL.
The allowable range is 0.0 to 1.0
Desiccant Humidity Control Unit (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)

Desiccant humidity control units are connected before the AHU and pre-process
the outdoor air. The way the desiccant humidity control unit is modelled in CAMEL
is detailed in clause 7-40 Psychrometrics.
The input items are:
Precool CW/DX
This nominates whether the pre-cooling coil for the desiccant humidity control unit
is a DX (refrigerant) or Chilled Water coil. This is also the flag to indicate that a

desiccant humidity control unit is being installed for this AHU.
Fan kW
This is the kW of the fan drawing the air through the pre-cooling coil, DX coil and
the desiccant wheel and it causes an additional temperature rise in the desiccant
dehumidified air.
Selection
This provides for entry of the DX cooling coil capacity (when the pre-cooling coil
is Chilled Water) and/or the moisture removal at the Design conditions (entered
on the Project Screen) for a selected desiccant humidity control unit. It enables a
re-run of CAMEL with the actual DX cooling coil capacity and/or the actual
moisture removal of a selected humidity control unit for a particular
manufacturer’s unit so that the capacity of the main AHU and chilled water pre-
cooling coil (if it is a CW coil) can be more accurately estimated.
Note that the methodology for sizing the desiccant humidity control unit is based
on data and information supplied by Munters Pty Ltd which may not apply to other
manufacturers units
DX Capacity kW
The actual capacity of the DX unit heating the de-activation air of the desiccant
wheel and providing cooling and dehumidification of the outside air. This is to
provide for a re-run of CAMEL with a selected HCU. If left blank the program
estimates the moisture removal at design conditions.
This is assumed to remain constant at all outdoor air conditions with the unit
cycling at part load conditions with a lower load than the capacity of the DX Coil.
[0 to 99999]
Moist Rem. g/kg

The actual moisture removal (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel for a selected Humidity
Control Unit at the entered design conditions (as entered on the Project Screen).
This is to provide for a re-run of CAMEL with a selected HCU. If left blank the
program estimates the moisture removal at design conditions.
The entered or estimated value is varied at other outdoor air conditions as a
function of the ambient DB, WB and Specific Humidity and the Specific Humidity
of the air leaving the HCU. [Range 0 to 10]
Preconditioner Plant Number (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)

This allows the user to assign the current AHU to a preconditioner plant entered
on the Preconditioner Tab Page thus the outside air supplied to this AHU will be at
the temperature (DB and WB) specified as the leaving temperatures of the
nominated Preconditioner. Refer also to clause 3-110.

4-30 The AHU Coil Tab Page
On this Tab Page details of the AHU Coil is entered. Following is a description of
each item on this tab page:
Psychrometrics
In this panel the alternative means of calculating the psychrometrics (coil details
and air quantities) are entered. Refer to clause 7-40 of this User Guide for further
discussion on how CAMEL calculates the psychrometrics. First a selection is
made from the selection list and then the appropriate fields for data input appear.
The selection list is between:
 By-pass Factor (Fig 4-30B) in which case a bypass factor must be entered
with or without an ADP. If the ADP is not entered, the room RH in each room
served by this AHU will be a function of the individual room RSHF lines. If
the ADP is entered, then all the room RHs will move up or down depending
on the nominated value.
Fig 4-30A The AHU Coil Tab Page

 Fixed Leaving Conditions (Fig 4-30C) in which case a leaving dry bulb
temperature must be entered with optionally a fixed wet bulb temperature or
an ADP. If only the dry bulb is entered, the program calculates the required
wet bulb temperature to meet the specified room conditions. Note however,
there will be a spread of RH in individual rooms depending on the slope of
the RSHF line for each room. If the wet bulb or ADP is nominated, all the
room RHs will move up or down accordingly.
 Fixed Supply Air (Fig 4-30D) in which case a supply air quantity must be
entered. If the supply and quantity is required to be higher or lower than the
dehumidified air quantity using a fixed bypass around the coil, then a bypass
type is entered together with a leaving dry bulb temperature or a leaving dry
bulb and wet bulb temperature or a bypass factor. These latter quantities are

used to calculate the dehumidified air quantity through the coil. Note that this
Fixed Air Quantity must be greater than any Minimum Supply Air entered on
the Project or the Zones & Rooms Tab Pages.
The data input items for the appropriate psychrometrics selection are:
Bypass factor #
Fig 4-30B Psychrometrics – Bypass Factor

The cooling coil by-pass factor represents the portion of the air passing through
the coil that is completely unaltered psychometrically. For typical values refer to
Tables 55 and 56, p 124 in DA9. Allowable range is 0.0 to 0.99
Leaving DB # (C)
The cooling coil leaving dry bulb temperature ºC. [ range is 0 to 20ºC]
Leaving WB (C)
The cooling coil leaving wet bulb temperature ºC. The allowable range is zero to
20ºC and the wet bulb must be lower than the dry bulb.
Fig 4-30C Psychrometrics – Fixed Leaving Conditions

Apparatus Dew Point (C)
This allows the user to enter a fixed dew point for the coil. The allowable range is
2 to 28 C.
L/s #
The required air quantity L/s. Range is >0 to 99999.
If the resultant leaving coil temperature with this nominated supply air quantity is
less than the minimum specified (on the Projects Tab Page – refer Clause 3-20),
the air quantity is increased to satisfy this condition.
Fig 4-30D Psychrometrics - Fixed Supply Air

The nominated supply air quantity must also be greater than any minimum air
quantity entered on the Projects Tab Page. If the entered supply air quantity
results in a room air quantity in a particular room that is less than any specified
minimum air quantity then the nominated supply air quantity is increased until the

room minimum is satisfied.
If a (fixed) bypass type is nominated and the calculated dehumidified air quantity
is less than the nominated supply air quantity then CAMEL treats the system as a
dump back system, ie. Air is dumped back from the leaving side of the coil back
through the by-pass to the inlet of the coil. A system sometimes used to increase
moisture removal.
Refer pages 122-123 of DA9 for further information on these types of systems.
ByPass Type
This is entered when the calculated dehumidified air is to pass through the coil
and extra air (to increase the air change rate in the room) is bypassed through a
fixed bypass around the coil. Select MIX if the bypassed air is a mixture of
outside and return air or RET if it is all R/A, ie. all O/A passes through the coil.
Evaporative Cooler Efficiency # (Evap Coolers only)

This item appears on this Tab Page when an evaporative cooler is being
analysed. It is the Efficiency of the Evaporative Cooler entered as a percentage.
Allowable range is 40 to 100%.
Indirect Evap Cooler Effectiveness (Indirect Evap Coolers only)

This is the means of expressing the effectiveness of the indirect evaporative
cooler. The choice is between:
Wet Bulb approach – This is a measure of the effectiveness in regard to the
supply air dry bulb temperature (LvgDB) that can be achieved in relation to
the ambient WB as given by:
(1 – (LeavingDB – AmbientWB) ) *100 %
AmbientWB
It is assumed to be independent of Ambient DB temperatures and also
independent of supply air quantity. [80 to 150]
Dew Point Efficiency – this is the
(AmbientDB – Supply air DB) * 100 %.

(AmbientDB – Room Dew Point)
This is again assumed to be independent of the ambient dry bulb and supply
air quantity. [50 to 100]
Leaving DB – this is the supply air leaving dry bulb temperature assumed to be
constant at all ambient conditions and independent of air quantity. [0 to 20]
The assumptions listed for each of the above may be invalid and the user may,
after running CAMEL, have to change the entered values based on the ambient
conditions at the time of the peak load.
Fan Gains
Supply Fan Type
Select from blow through or draw through. If draw through, it is treated as a
supply duct gain, if blow though a return duct gain.
Supply Units
The units for the supply fan heat gain, select from

% - Percentage of room sensible heat,
kW – the kilowatts of the fan motor added to the air stream
Pa - Pressure rise of the fan in Pa (equals system pressure drop).
Supply Value
Supply Fan heat according to the Units selected. If the units are % the program
calculates the fan KW as the entered value times the AHU total room sensible heat
divided by 100. Table 53, page 109 to 111of DA9 (and help) lists typical values for a
range of total pressure and temperature difference, room to supply air. If the units are
Pa the program calculates air quantity/1000/ Fan efficiency which is assumed as
70%
Return Units
The units for the return fan heat gain, same as supply units above.
Return Value
Return Fan heat according to the Units selected, same as supply value above
Return Duct Gains (Not applicable to Evap Cooling)

This is the heat gain to return ducts expressed as a percent of room sensible
heat.
In applying return duct gains the program assumes that all exhaust air (ie. supply
air - return air) occurs from the room except when a outside/exhaust air heat
exchanger is used (refer Clause 7-30). If the resultant return air quantity is too
low, eg. In systems with a high percentage of outside air, unrealistic return duct
temperatures can occur. If there is no return air then any entered return duct
gains are ignored.
% Heat Gain
Heat gain to supply duct expressed as a percentage of the total room sensible
heat. Refer DA9 p 111. Allowable range is 0 to 20%
% Leakage Gain
Heat gain due to duct leakage gain expressed as total room sensible heat. Refer
DA9 p 111. Allowable range is 0 to 20%
External Gain (kW)

A negative value can be entered to model a cooling effect such as R/A drawn
from around a refrigerated cabinet, in the room. Allowable range is any value.
Cooling Safety factor %

Expressed as a % of room total heat to account for any uncertainty of the internal
and fabric loads. Refer DA9 pp 110-111. Allowable range is 0 to 20%.
Heating Safety Factor %

A percentage increase in the sensible fabric heating load to account for any
uncertainty of these loads. The number has a similar effect to the safety factor
applied to the cooling. Note that there is also a percentage Heat Up capacity for
the Heater or Boiler (on the Project Screen) to allow for the heating up of the
boiler and piping and storage mass of the building.
Room Load Chart Printout

A selection for when the AHU and room load charts are to be calculated and
printed in the results. The selection is between
 At the time of the Peak GTH for the AHU and at the time of the peak Sensible
load for each room (Default)
 At the time of the Peak GTH for the AHU and at the time of the peak Sensible
zone load for each room
 Both at nominated Time and Month

The AHU load chart is simply the summation of the zone and room loads plus the
outside air loads and the supply fan heat gain
If there is only one room on each zone, then the first two options give the same
result.
Time and Month

Time and Month of the AHU and room load chart printout in the results. Time is
on a 24 hour clock basis. If the CARRIER weather data corrections are used (ie.
not the standard location number or File) JUN, JUL, AUG in the southern
hemisphere (or DEC, JAN, FEB in the northern hemisphere) cannot be entered.
Fig 4-30E The AHU-Coil Tab Page with Show All
4-40 The Zone and Room Tab Page

On this Tab Page general information for each room including floor area, ceiling
height etc. is entered and if there are zones in the AHU and multiple rooms in a
zone, details of how the air is to be distributed to each room. Refer Fig 4-40A. If
‘Show All’ is selected the data for all zones appears in columns see Fig 4-40C.
If ‘All Single Zone/Room Units’ has been selected on the Projects Tab Page, the
Zone panel on the left of Fig 4-40A will not be present and the Room Title defaults
to the AHU Title. Also the outside air is entered on the AHU Tab Page and the
extra items on the toolbar (to the right of the Add New AHU button) described in
clause 4-10 (which are no longer applicable) do not appear.
Fig 4-40A The Zone and Room Tab Page

If All Single Zone/Room Units on the Project Tab Page has been checked, then
some of the items on this Tab Page are not relevant and are omitted from the Tab
Page to simplify the input.

The items on the Zone Panel are:
Zone Number
The current zone number of the current room.
Number off
The number of similar zones. In the calculations the program when accumulating
AHU loads, air quantities, etc., multiplies the zone loads etc. by n where n is
Number off.
Air Distribution to Rooms based on

This allows the user to nominate whether the zone air quantities to rooms are to
be apportioned in each zone according to the individual peak room sensible loads
or floor area.
VAV Turn Down %
The Turn Down in CAMEL is the minimum air quantity delivered by the VAV box
divided by the maximum air quantity expressed as a percentage. However the
VAV box is assumed never to turn down to less than the outside air quantity so if
a value for the turn down is not entered or if the outside air exceeds the minimum
determined by the entered turn down percentage, the outside air quantity is taken
as the minimum. [10 to 100]
Main Input Panel items are:

Title
An appropriate title comprising letters or numbers up to 20 characters in length.
Number off
The number of similar rooms in this zone. In the calculations the program when
determining zone loads etc., multiplies the room loads etc. by m where m is the
Number off.
Floor Area (m2) #

2
Total room floor area (m ). This is used in determining air change rates and
check figures.
Ceiling Height (mm) #

Room ceiling height in mm. Only used for calculating air change rates and check
figures. Refer pp.94, 95 of DA9. Value entered must be greater than 10.0 mm.
Storage Mass (kg/m2). #

2
Mass per unit area of floor in kg/m . This is used to determine storage load
factors. (Refer Table 6, p.26 of DA9). A value must be entered if glass or lighting
loads exist.
The storage mass is determined by summing the total mass of the external walls
and roofs in the zone and the total mass of any partitions, floors, and ceilings
adjacent to unconditioned spaces. If any partitions, floors or ceilings are adjacent
to conditioned spaces or if the floor is carpeted, use half the mass for those
areas. For more details see the notes under Table 10 in DA9.
Provision is made for the user to calculate the storage mass from all the room
components that add mass and to use this calculator, the right mouse is clicked
on the field headed “Calc” in Show All and “St mass calculated” in Show Single.
Any entered value of storage mass is used in preference to the calculated value.
See Storage Mass Calculator at the end of this clause.
Storage Mass -Calculated

When the mouse is right clicked on this field, the Calculate Storage Mass (see
below) form appears where the user can calculate the storage mass for this room.
Any components such as walls, windows, partitions, etc that have been entered

for the current room, are automatically inserted in the form when it is selected and
the user can then add other components such as furniture, extra partitions that
don’t contribute to the thermal load, etc.
If a user enters a value in the Storage Mass field above, this is used in preference
to the calculated value. If a storage mass has not been entered in the field above,
then the calculated value is used.
If components contributing to the storage mass are changed, (e.g. an external
surface dimension or material or a partition area or the room area), the
corresponding value in the storage mass calculator is updated.
Infiltration Air Changes/hr

Infiltration due to wind forces of outside air into conditioned zone entered as air
changes/hour. Refer Table 44 pages 94-95 of DA9.
Vapour Gain (kW)

Latent heat gain in kW due to water vapour transmission through the walls, etc.
Refer Table 43, p.88 of DA9.
Outside air
This is only available if Outside air on the AHU Tab Page is set to ‘Enter at
rooms’. The selection list is for the units for outside air quantity which may be
selected from:
Air Changes / hour (>0.0 to 25.0)
Fixed air quantity in L/s (>0.0)
2
L/s per m of floor area (>0.0 to 10.0)
L/s per person (>0.0 to 20.0)
No Outside air (blank)
When All Single Zone/Room Units is checked % supply (>0 to 100) appears on
this selection list in lieu of the outside air entry on the AHU Tab Page.
Value
Value of the outside air quantity according to the units selected in the outside air
units drop down list. Refer pp.94 and 95 of DA9 and AS1668.
When a profile is entered for people and the units are L/s per person, the air
quantity is based on the maximum number of people in the profile.
Careful thought should be given to return duct gains when entering a large outside
air proportion, as this may lead to low return air quantities absorbing relatively
Fig 4-40B Outside Air Selection
high return duct gains, producing unrealistic high return air temperatures.
Allowable ranges are listed under units above.
When the right mouse symbol to the left of the selection list is clicked, an “Outside
Air (to AS1668-2012 Selection Panel” appears displaying the required outside air
quantity for different occupancy types according to AS1668 – 2012. First the
Building Category is selected and then in the second selection list the occupancy
type and outside air quantity is selected. In this second selection list the floor area

per person according to AS1668 is also displayed for information.
At the bottom of the panel are three buttons:
Cancel – this closes the selection panel

Help – provides help on this panel
Apply – Inserts the Units and value in the Outside air Fields
Extracted Air from Room

Litres/sec
This allows for the entry of an air quantity to be extracted from the room. An
example would be a fume exhaust hood in the room. The program assumes that
an amount of room air equal to the outside air quantity entering the AHU is all
exhausted from the rooms in proportion to the supply air quantity. The user
entered extracted air in this situation does not affect the calculations.
When the outside air to the AHU is pre-treated with a heat exchanger however
either directly (AHU Tab) or via a pre-conditioner with a heat exchanger, the air
exhausted through the heat exchanger will be reduced by the nominated
extracted air and if this results in a significant difference between the incoming
outside air and the outgoing exhaust air, then the efficiency of the heat exchanger
may be reduced.
Note that if the outside air is supplied direct to the rooms on an AHU (nominated
on the AHU Tab), a heat exchanger cannot be added directly to the AHU but a
heat exchanger can be specified on any preconditioner pre-conditioning the direct
outside air.
Spill To:
This allows the nominated extracted air quantity to "spill" into another air
conditioned room. If an air quantity is not nominated the program uses by default,
the total outside air (via the supply air through the AHU or “direct” into the room).
The user simply selects the room (from the selection list) into which the exhaust
air is to spill. An example of this is a shop that spills air into the central Mall of a
Shopping Centre. If a room is not nominated the entered extracted air is
exhausted to outside (e.g. an exhaust hood) or to adjacent internal areas in the
building such as duct risers, ceiling spaces, etc.
Extracted air cannot be spilled into another room that has extracted air. Nor can
air be extracted from a room that has air extracted into it.
If a heat exchanger is fitted to the AHU either directly (AHU Tab) or on a
preconditioner serving this AHU, the nominated extracted air may reduce the
exhaust air passing through the heat exchanger and if this results in a significant
difference between the incoming outside air and the outgoing exhaust air, then
the efficiency of the heat exchanger may be reduced.
Minimum Supply Air Quantity

Minimum supply air quantity to be delivered to the room. The minimum supply air
is taken as the larger of the required outside air or the entered minimum supply
air. The options available, with the allowable ranges in parenthesis, are:
Air Changes rate [0.0 to 60.0]
Fixed L/s [>0.0]
L/s per m2 [0.0 to 20.0]
Note that with multi zone or multi room systems, if the air quantity is increased in

any room because it is less than the minimum, the air quantity in all rooms and
zones on that AHU will be increased because the leaving coil temperature needs
to be increased. The exception to this is with face and bypass systems and VAV
with reheat systems where the increase only applies to the specific zone. For a
detailed explanation see Minimum Air Quantity in clause 7-40.
Supply Duct Gains

Heat gain to supply ducts.
% Heat Gain
Heat gain due to conduction through the ducts. Refer DA9 pp 106-109.
Allowable range is 0 to 20%
% Leakage Loss
Heat gain allowance for air leakage. Refer DA9 pp 109-111. Range is 0 to 20%
External Gain (kW)

Supply duct external heat gain in kW. This item is for any external heat gains
such as solar loads on exposed supply air ducts which can be expressed in kW
rather than a percentage gain. Draw through fan heat gain can also be entered
as a direct kW load, if known, rather than a % of room sensible heat.
Return Air Room
Connected to Return Air Room

This connects the current room to the Return Air Room on this AHU such that the
return air from this room returns to the AHU picking up heat from the fabric and
internal loads entered in the R.A.Room
Thermostat Location
Radio buttons to select whether the thermostat controlling the zone supply air
temperature is located in one of the rooms on this zone or in the return air duct
from the zone. It is only available for single zone systems (Single Zone Heating &
Cooling, RCHP and Evaporative Cooling systems) because in multi zone systems
the thermostat is normally located in the return air stream for the zone.
Fig 4-40C The Zone and Room Tab Page – Show all
Recalculate Storage Mass Button

This recalculates the storage mass for all rooms where the storage mass has
previously been calculated. If items that affect the calculation of the storage
mass, such as external surfaces and windows, partitions and floors, floor area,
etc, have been changed, warning messages are displayed indicating that the
calculated value for particular rooms may need to be recalculated. This can be
done by re-entering the storage mass calculator form for the particular room.

Alternatively by selecting this button calculated values for all rooms that had
previously been calculated are recalculated.
Calculate Storage Mass Form

This form provides a means of calculating the storage mass of a room which is
used by CAMEL to estimate the thermal time lag of the heat transmitted into and
out of a thermal space.
At the top of the form is a button “Reset Defaults” which allows the user to rest
some of the defaults on this form. The Reset Defaults Button and Form is detailed
at the end of this topic.
Fig 4-40D Calculate Storage Mass Form
The Form is divided into four sections:

External Surfaces (Walls and Roofs)

Floor
Ceilings and Partitions
Furniture and Others
At the bottom of the form is:
Total Mass - The sum of the mass of all items
Floor Area - This is the room floor area as entered on the Zones and Rooms screen
Storage Mass - The Total Mass of all items divided by the room floor area - This value
can be inserted into the Storage Mass field on the Zones and Rooms screen by hitting the
Apply Button.
Cancel Button - Closes the form and clears all the extracted and entered data
Help Button - Help on this for screen
Apply Button - If there are no errors on the form (No red faces on all three
sections), selecting Apply will insert this calculated value in the Storage Mass field
on the Zones and Rooms screen
The Tool Bar Buttons are:
Add – Adds another item (floor, partition etc.). In the case of floors or ceilings and partitions
these are added after those that were entered on the Partitions Tab Page.
Delete – Deletes the item where the cursor is located (added items only)
Validate – An indication if there are errors (red face) or not (green face) in the data entered
in this panel. Left clicking the red face provides a list of the errors
External Surfaces (Walls and Roofs)

This includes the External surfaces entered on the External Screen.
The listed items are (with items extracted from other screens or generated by the
program) in italics:
Row ID – Not editable, inserted by the program
Surface Number - This is the Surface number of each External Surface entered on the
External Surfaces screen for this room. The surface number is extracted from the
External Surfaces screen and is repeated for each additional window on the
surface.
Exposure - This Is:
 the surface azimuth angle or orientation (N, NE,…..SUN etc) for the surface
 "WINDOW" if there is a window in the first column for the surface
 The surface azimuth angle followed by (win) if the surface is all window
 +Wind if it is an extra window on the surface
Type - This is the wall or roof type for a surface or the window type for a window
2
Area (m ) - The calculated net area of the External wall, roof or window
Thickness (mm) - The user entered thickness of the glass if the item is a window. Default
10 mm.
2
Surface Density (kg/m ) - The surface density of the item. For windows it is assumed to
3
be 2500 kg/m times the glass thickness in meters
Factor - A factor to discount the storage affect of a particular item if the surface of the
material prevents all the heat falling on the surface conducting into the surface.
For example if the surface is covered with a soft material such as carpet or
acoustic lining the factor might be 0.5. For partitions ceilings or floors that have an
air conditioned space on the exterior, the factor should be multiplied by a further
0.5
The default is 1.0 for external walls indicating fully absorbent wall and 0.5 for
internal partitions, floors and ceilings.

Mass - This is the total mass of the item calculated from the Area and surface density
Floors
This includes any Internal floors entered on the Partitions Screen with provision
for the user to add any others that do not affect the heat transfer but add to the
total room mass.
The listed floors are:
 those entered on the Partitions Screen under Floor for this room
 when the floor area of any floor on the Partitions Screen is less than the Room
Floor Area on the Zones & Rooms Screen (e.g. when there is no heat
transmission but they add to the storage mass), an additional floor (+Floor) is
generated by the program such that the total floor area of all floors entered for
this room equals the Room Floor Area
 any User entered floors
The items for each floor are:
Title - This is the type of floor (Floor, +Floor or User entered floor) Note that the Title
must be unique
Material – For a floor extracted from the Partitions Screen, if a material has been selected
for the U-value, the material is listed (along with its surface density). For a +Floor
or User entered Floor, the user can enter their own material description (and
surface density) or the material (and surface density) can be selected from the
CAMEL list of materials by right clicking the mouse.
Area (m²) - The surface area of the Floor entered on the Partitions screen or calculated
by the program so that the total area of floors matches the value for this room on
the Zones & Rooms Screen. Or entered here by the user for added floors .
Surface Density (kg/m²) - The surface density of the Floor if a material was selected for
the U value or entered here by the user
Factor - A factor to discount the storage affect of the floor if the surface finish prevents all
the heat falling on the surface conducting into the surface (for example if the
surface is covered with a soft material such as carpet or acoustic lining) in which
case the factor might be 0.5. If the floor has an air conditioned space on the
exterior side, the factor should be multiplied by a further 0.5
The default is 0.5.
Mass - This is the total mass of the item calculated by the program from the Area
and surface density.
Ceilings and Partitions

This includes any Internal ceilings or partitions entered on the Partitions Screen
with provision for the user to add any others that do not affect the heat transfer
but add to the total room mass.
The listed items are:
Those entered on the Partitions screen for this Room and any user entered extra
ceilings and partitions (e.g. when there is no heat transmission but they add to the
storage mass):
Title - This is the type of any ceiling or partition entered on the Partitions screen ( Ceiling,
P1 to P5) or other than these, a Title entered by the user for any additional
ceilings or partitions that the user wishes to include in the mass calculation
Material - For a ceiling or partition extracted from the Partitions Screen, if a material has
been selected for the U-value, the material is extracted (along with its surface
density). For any User entered Ceilings or Partitions, the user can enter their own
material description (and surface density) or the material (and surface density)
can be selected from the CAMEL list of materials by right clicking the mouse.

Area (m²) - The surface area of the Ceiling or Partition entered on the Partitions screen or
entered here by the user for additional ceilings and partitions.
Surface Density (kg/m²) - The surface density of the Ceiling or Partition if a material was
selected for the U value or entered here by the user
Factor - A factor to discount the storage affect of the ceiling or partition if the surface
finish prevents all the heat falling on the surface conducting into the surface (for
example if the surface is covered with a soft material such as carpet or acoustic
lining) in which case the factor might be 0.5. If the ceiling or partition has an air
conditioned space on the exterior side, the factor should be multiplied by a further
0.5
The default is 0.5.
Mass - This is the total mass of the item calculated from the Area and surface density.
Furniture and Others
This provides for entry of any other items such as furniture that do not affect the
heat transfer but add to the total room mass.
Copy - this copies the data for “Furniture and Others” from another (selected) room to the
current room.
The listed items are:

Title - A descriptive title of the Furniture item or other mass being included.
Mass/Unit Floor Area (kg/m2) - The mass per unit room floor area.
Mass - This is the total mass of the item ie, Floor area x Mass per unit Floor Area, where
the Floor Area is as entered on the Zones and Rooms screen. Alternatively if the
Mass/Unit Floor Area is not entered the total mass of the item can be entered
directly.
Reset Defaults Button

The defaults on this form are initially set for each new project with the values from
the Project Defaults Form which is accessed via File>Project Defaults on the Main
screen. This button allows the user to re-set these defaults for this project (run of
CAMEL) only. If values are changed at any time, the storage mass for all rooms
will be recalculated using these changed values.
Fig 4-40E Reset Defaults (for The Storage Mass Calculator) Form

Reset Default Parameters Form
This Form rests the defaults on the Storage Mass Calculator Form for all rooms in
the current project. The items for which defaults can be set are:
Glass Thickness (for Windows in the External Surfaces)
The Factor to be applied to Walls and Windows (in the External Surfaces)
The Factor to be applied to Roofs (in the External Surfaces)
The Surface Density and Factor for Floors
The Factor to be applied to Partitions
4-50 External (Walls & Roofs) Tab Page
4-50A The External Tab Page With A Surface with Two Different Window Types
On this Tab Page external walls (and roofs) with their windows (and skylights) are
entered as a series of separate surfaces (columns), a separate surface (column)
being required if the section of wall has a different orientation, is of different
construction or has a different percentage of it’s heat gain to a ceiling return air
plenum or ceiling space.
Each surface can only include one wall type and any number of one or more
window types. Both the external surface, including the window(s), and the
window(s) themselves can have shading schemes. The program calculates the
shading effect of each shading surface at each hour on the wall (or roof) and each
window (or skylight) ie. the shadow from all shading schemes is determined on all
components comprising the external surface (refer clause 7-90 for further
details). Shading devices on one external surface however, have no influence on
any other external surface.
The External Tab Page has a graphic display which displays the particular surface
where the cursor is located. When in the upper part of the Tab Page it will display
the wall, windows and their shades (reveals and overhangs). When in the lower
part of the Tab Page a plan and elevation of any adjacent shading is displayed.
This graphic can be turned on or off by checking the DRAW box at the top left of
the Tab Page. The graphic can be rotated by clicking and dragging with the
mouse: right clicking will take it to the default position. The default position is set
in the configuration – colours. (Refer clause 2-50)
Note that in this Tab Page in Show Single mode the = sign causes the next non

blank field to the left in the current row to be copied into the field where the cursor
is currently located while in Show All mode the = sign copies the field above.
Note that if the surface is all window, then the surface Height, Width, Shading
Scheme, % to R/A, Wall/Roof Type and Absorptivity are not entered.
When the ‘Show All’ is clicked the external surfaces for all rooms are shown in
columns as shown in Fig 4-50B.
Fig 4-50B The External Tab Page – Show All

Copy and Paste can also be used to copy from one column to another.
Deletes the data (column or with Show All the row) where the cursor is
located. If the cursor is on a surface, the surface and any additional
windows attached to this surface will be deleted. If the cursor is on an
additional window, only the additional window will be deleted
Copy Surface or Additional Window– Copies the data (column) where
the cursor is located. If the cursor is on a surface, the surface and any
additional windows attached to this surface will be copied. If the cursor is
on an additional window, only the additional window will be copied
Paste Surface or Additional Window – Paste the surface currently in
the clipboard to where the cursor is located on the External screen as
nominated on the Paste External Form (see fig. 4-50J) detailed at the end
of this sub-chapter.
In either mode an extra surface is added to an existing room by clicking
the ‘Add Surface’ button (Column in Show Single or Row in Show All).
This button adds a new additional window to the current surface. When
the additional window is added the “+ Wind” is inserted for the Azimuth
and only window data (from Window Type to H-offset) can be entered in
this column.
Draw – a checkbox that turns the graphic on or off (when a single space is
displayed) to allow the user to see more columns (up to 9) at a time
Following is a description of each item on this Tab Page:-
Exposure #
For walls (with or without windows) enter:-
- N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW or
- an azimuth angle (360) (refer Fig. 4-50C)
The angle from building north (0) to the outward normal to the surface, with
clockwise rotation positive. The azimuth angle for a north facing wall in both the
southern hemisphere and the northern hemisphere is 0

Fig. 4-50C Exposure Selection Form
If a rotation angle has been entered (on the Project Tab Page), the building
rotation angle is added to the azimuth angle entered here to give the true azimuth
angle as indicated by the north pointer. Refer Fig 4-50C.
For roofs (with or without skylights) enter:-
-H for a shaded horizontal roof, followed by the azimuth angle of the
roof imagining it is standing upright with any overhang at the top.
- SUN for horizontal a roof in sun all the time
- SHADE for horizontal a roof in shade all the time
- SPRAY for horizontal a sprayed roof
- WATER for horizontal a water covered roof
Note: CAMEL only models horizontal roofs.
Note : Clicking the Right Mouse Button pops up a selection form (fig. 4-50C), from
which any of the above can be selected using the mouse. Also if the selection for
a roof is made through this selection box and it is the first roof in this zone, the
program determines the roof dimensions (height and width) as the square root of
the entered floor area.
Height (mm)# (N/A if surface is all window)

Height of the external surface in mm or for a roof with shading it is the dimension
parallel to the direction of exposure. If the wall is all window, leave blank.
Width (mm)# (N/A if surface is all window)

Width of the external surface in mm or for a roof with shading it is the dimension
perpendicular to the selected orientation. If the wall is all window, leave blank.
Shading Scheme (N/A if surface is all window)

Cross reference to a shading scheme entered in the Shading Tab Page that is to
be applied to this external surface. This shading scheme shades the whole
surface including any windows in the surface. It cannot be entered for roofs
unless the H format is used.

Clicking the Right Mouse Button pops up a selection list from which the user can
select a previously entered Shading scheme, or can edit or enter a new shading
scheme (Refer fig. 4-50A). This is achieved by clicking the Edit button on the
selection box upon which the user will be dropped into the Shading Tab Page.
Shading scheme dimensions (Distance, Right side, Left side. etc.) are taken from
the outside of the surface and shading scheme, reveals and overhangs on roofs
project vertically.
% to Return Air (N/A if surface is all window)

Percentage of the total surface load (including any window load in this surface) to
be treated as a return duct gain. Note if window loads are not to be included, the
surface can be broken into 2 surfaces, one with the wall above the false ceiling
and one (with windows) below the false ceiling line. However remember that
shading devices on one external surface do not have any effect on any other
external surface. (The allowable range is 0 to 100% and the default is 0).
Fig 4-50E The Pop-up Selection List for Wall/Roof Type
Fig 4-50F The Full Wall/Roof Pop-up selection

Wall/Roof
Type # (N/A if surface is all window)
Either a type from the Walls Tab Page or from the standard list of walls and roofs
can be entered directly or alternatively selected from a list accessed by right
clicking the mouse. First a list of all previously referenced walls appears together
with those entered in the Walls Tab Page (fig. 4-50E). If the Show All button on
this list is clicked, access to the standard list is provided (fig 4-50F).
A standard wall or roof is selected by selecting the appropriate type (Double brick,
Hollow concrete block, etc.) then:
For walls:
A drop down list allows selection of
 all walls for the selected wall type
 all single skin walls for the selected wall type
 all double skin walls for the selected wall type
If the last item is selected then a series of radio buttons appears from which
the user can further restrict the displayed list by insulation type.
For roofs
Either click the ‘Show All’ check box to obtain a full listing for the selected
roof type, or select from ‘no insulation’, ‘R1.5', ‘R2.0' or ‘R2.5 insulation’ to
obtain a restricted list.
The thermal resistance, conductivities and the densities used in compiling
the standard list are listed in Appendix D.
When the standard walls/roofs are called up from the external Tab Page, the
program also displays the user entered walls/roofs so that the user can select
from either, or if required, edit the user entered walls.
Absorptivity # (N/A if surface is all window)

The absorptivity of wall or roof. Typical values are listed on p.58 of DA9. If the
wall is all glass leave this field blank.
Note that allowance should be made for surfaces being dirty or tarnished.
Window /Skylight
Type
Window/Skylight type identifier from the Windows Tab Page. Skylights cannot be
entered on SPRAY or WATER covered roofs.
Clicking the right mouse button pops up a list from which the user can select a
window type or if required edit an existing or add a new window type.
Number of windows (# if window type entered)

The number of windows or skylights in this external surface.
Direction V/H
This is the direction in which the windows are to be spaced when more than one
window type. V indicates windows are spaced vertically, H horizontally
Shading Scheme
Cross reference to a shading scheme entered in the Shading Tab Page that is to
be applied to this window. Shading schemes for skylights can only be entered if
the roof EXPOSE uses the H format. Shading scheme dimensions are taken
from the outside of each window.
Dist Between
Distance between the windows or skylights if there are more than one (mm). If
they abut then this field is left blank.

V-offset (mm)
The distance from the bottom of the surface to the lower edge of the window or
skylight (mm).
H-offset (mm)
The distance from the left side of the surface to the left edge of the left most
window or skylight (mm).
Note that if there is no shading on the wall or window the window does not need to
be located in the wall ie. Distance and V and H-Offsets need not be entered
Fig 4-50G The External Tab Page with Adjacent Shading Surface.
Adjacent shading
This is the details of shading from adjacent buildings, etc. Note the units here are
all metres not millimetres.
Fig 4-50H Shading from an Adjacent Building

Distance #
The distance between the surface & the adjacent building or shading surface (m)
Height #
The height to the top of the adjacent building or shading surface measured from
the bottom of the surface being shaded (m).
Width #
The width of the adjacent building or shading surface (m).

Left Shift
The distance the shading surface projects past the left end of the surface being
shaded (negative if the adjacent building is within the left hand end of the shaded
surface (m).
Depth
The depth of the adjacent building or shading surface (m). The depth can be
negative in which case the side walls of the adjacent building form a U shaped
building. (Refer Fig 4-50I)
Fig 4-50I Shading from a courtyard (Adjacent Building with negative depth equal
to distance)
Fig 4-50J Paste External Form

Paste External Form
On this form the action required when the Paste button is selected is
detailed. The actions available depends on whether a surface has been copied
into the clipboard or whether an Additional window has been copied:
If a Surface has been copied into the clipboard, the items on the form are:
Copy Data from – AHU N, Zone Z “Room Title” Surface S which
identifies the data currently in the clipboard
To – Surface s on AHU n, Zone z “Room Title” if the Overwrite radio
button (below) is selected
To – New Surface on AHU n, Zone z “Room Title” if the Insert New radio
button (below) is selected
O Overwrite O Insert New - a selection as to whether the surface in the

clipboard is to overwrite the surface where the cursor is located or
to Insert the copied surface to a new (additional)surface.
[ ] Include all extra windows - if checked pastes all the extra windows on
the copied surface. If unchecked only copies the surface without
the extra windows
If an Additional window has been copied into the clipboard, the items on the
form are:
Copy Data from – AHU N, Zone Z “Room Title” Surface S, Window S +
Wn which identifies the data currently in the clipboard
To – Window s + Wn on AHU n, Zone z “Room Title” Surface s. if the
Overwrite radio button (below) is selected
To – New Extra Window on AHU n, Zone z “Room Title” Surface s. if the
radio button (below) is selected
O Overwrite O Insert New - a selection as to whether the additional
window in the clipboard is to overwrite the additional window
where the cursor is or to Insert the copied additional window to a
new additional window on the current surface.
[ ] Include all extra windows – disabled (greyed out); not applicable
4-60 The Partitions Tab Page

On this Tab Page details of internal floors, ceilings and partitions that are next to
unconditioned spaces or spaces at a different temperature are entered. This
includes floors above car parks rooms below an unconditioned plant room but
NOT rooms below a roof (which should be entered as an External Surface (see
clause 4-50).
Note that in this Tab Page in show single mode the = sign causes the next non
blank field to the left to be copied into the field where the cursor is currently
located while in the show all mode the + sign copied the field above.
If ‘Show All’ is selected the data for all rooms appears in columns as shown in Fig
4-60B.
Following is a description of each item on this Tab Page.
Fig 4-60A The Partitions Tab Page

Area (m2) #
2
The area of the floor, ceiling or partition (m ).
U Value (W/m2.K) #
2
The summer U Value of the partition, floor or ceiling (W/m K).
Right clicking the mouse brings up a list extracted from Table 26-28, 33 & 34, pp.
65-71 of DA9. Refer fig. 4-60C.
Winter U values for heating are computed from the summer values – see 7-10
Heating and Cooling Loads for more details

Fig 4-60B The Partitions Tab Page – Show All
Select U-value Form
This form allows for the selection of a U-Value for partitions. At the top of the
form there are three buttons:
Close and return to the Partitions Tab Page

Help
After a selection has been made, clicking this button will transfer the
selected U-value into the U-value field on the Partitions Tab Page.
Below this are four radio buttons to control the extent of items in the selection list
Floors and Ceilings Partitions 1 to 5
All - for all items All – for all items
Concrete - for concrete floors No Finish – bare construction
Timber - for timber floors Rendered or Plastered one side
Chipboard - for chipboard floors. Rendered or Plastered both sides
Fig. 4-60C U-Value selection form for Partitions

Then below this depending on the radio button selection typical U-values are
displayed in a selection list with a description of each partition construction.
Cool Flag
(C,P, or A) for the type of temperature difference across the partition when a
cooling load is being calculated
C- Constant temperature on the outside of the partition
P- for proportion of temperature difference between outside air and the
current space
A- for temperature to be added (subtracted if negative) to the outside
temperature. The temperature difference is then the outside

temperature plus the added temperature minus the room temperature.
Clicking the Right Mouse Button pops up a selection list as shown in Fig.4-60D.
Fig 4-60D C,P or A Options for COOL and HEAT Flag and Value
Value
The value corresponding to the flag above when the program is determining the
cooling load. The allowable ranges are:
C –20 to 50
P 0 to 1
A –20 to 20
HEAT Flag & Value

As for COOL Flag & Value. Applied when a heating load is being calculated.
4-70 The Internal Tab Page
Fig 4-70A The Internal Tab Page With Schedule Selection Box
All internal people, lights and equipment loads are entered in the Internal Tab
Page. If an internal load varies with time, a schedule from the Schedules Tab
Page can be assigned to the load.

Up to five people entries and five light entries can be made in the Internal Screen
for each room to cater for example for different people activities or different light
types in the one room. Additional people or lights are added by clicking the Add
buttons. Note that if CAMEL data is being loaded into BEAVER to calculate the
building energy consumption, BEAVER only allows one line of people and lights.
Fig 4-70B The Internal Tab Page – Show All

Any of the internal loads can have a % to return air and this proportion of the load
is then added to the return air load the remainder only being a room load.
Any of the internal loads can have a nominated % for heating and this proportion
of the entered load is then included when calculating the Winter Heating Load. By
default (blank) no (0) % of the internal loads are included when calculating the
Winter Heating Load.
Note that in this Tab Page the = sign causes the next non blank field above to be
copied down into the field where the cursor is currently located.
If ‘Show All’ is selected the data for all rooms appears in columns as shown in Fig
4-70B.
Following is a description of the items on this Tab Page.
People
Units #
Number of people, Floor area per person or people per 10 square metres.
Load #
2
Maximum number of people, floor area (m ) per person or persons per 10m² (for
floor area entered on the Zone & Rooms Tab page) occupying zone. Entered
value must be greater than zero. When the mouse is Right clicked on the Load
field an Occupancy Selection panel appears displaying suggested values from
AS1668 or Table D1.13 from the BCA
The mouse symbol only appears when the cursor is on the Load column for the
first of the five People rows.
Fig 4-70C Occupancy Selection Panel

This panel displays the required people occupancy types according to either
AS1668 – 2012 or BCA Table D1.13. First the Building Category is selected and
then in the second drop down list the occupancy type and floor area per person
are selected.
At the bottom of the panel are three buttons:
Close – this closes the selection panel
Apply – Inserts the Units and Value (under Load) on the first People line.
Note that the right mouse symbol only appears when the cursor is located on
Load and only for the first People row.
Schedule Number
The number of a schedule from the Schedules Tab Page. If left blank, the
maximum number of people are all assumed present during all hours of plant
operation. If the right mouse button is clicked, a selection list as shown in Fig 4-
70A will appear and the user can select a schedule or by clicking Edit drop into
the Schedules Tab Page and edit an existing schedule or add a new schedule.
The schedule title in the next column is displayed when the number is selected.
Fig 4-70D The People Activity Selection List
% of Return
This is the percentage of the people load that is to be considered as a return duct
gain - highly unlikely with people. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
% for Heating
This is the percentage sensible heat load from People loads that are to be
included when calculating the Winter Heating Load which will be reduced by the
entered percentage times the load. For example if the total people load is 10
people and a percentage of 60% is entered then the winter heating load will be
reduced by the sensible heat load of 6 people. If left blank none of the people
load will be included.
Activity #
A number between 1 and 11 corresponding to the row number in Table 45 p.98 of
DA9. From this the program extracts the sensible and latent heat from people

(metabolic rate). Clicking on the right mouse button will cause the list from DA9
to be displayed in the selection box illustrated in Fig.4-70D
Lights
Units #
2
Kilowatts or Watts per m of floor area.
Load #
2
Load from lights (including ballast, etc.) in kW or Watts per m .
Schedule Number - As for people
% of Return
This is the percentage of the lighting load that is to be considered as a return duct
gain. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
% for Heating
This is the percentage of the Lighting load that is to be included when calculating
the Winter Heating Load which will be reduced by the entered percentage times
2
the load. For example if the lighting load is 12 watts/m and a percentage of 60%
2
is entered then the winter heating load will be reduced by 0.6 x 12 w/m If left
blank none of the Lighting load will be included.
Light Type #
The type of lights. This is used in determining the storage load factors for the
lights. Clicking on the right mouse button will cause the selection box illustrated in
Fig.4-70E to appear. Note this does not allow for ballast load (the user should
include any ballast load in the total lighting load).
Fig 4-70E The Light Type Selection List
Sensible Equipment
Units #
2
Load #
2
Load from sensible equipment in kW or Watts per m . Entered value can be
positive or negative to cater for a cooling effect in the space. (Refer Table 46-52,
pp.99 to 107 of DA9).
Right clicking the Mouse when on the Sensible Load field (the right mouse symbol
is displayed above the Load column), a Sensible Load Calculation Panel
appears, to allow the user to calculate and store a list of the components that
make up the Sensible Load in the room. A description is entered, the units (kW or
W/m2) are selected and a value is entered. The units entered may be a mixture of

2
kW and W/m and when the apply button is clicked the total is applied to the
sensible load in the units selected beside that column.
Fig 4-70F Sensible Load Calculation Panel

At the bottom of the panel are four buttons:
Cancel – closes the panel without inserting any information in the Sensible
Load field
Clear – this clears all items in the calculation panel
Apply – Calculates the total kW Sensible Load from the entered values and
inserts the value under ‘Load’ for Sensible. If the Units under Sensible
have previously been selected as W/m2, then the value is calculated in
these units rather than kW.
Note that the right mouse symbol only appears when the cursor is located on Load.
Schedule Number
As for people
% of Return
This is the percentage of the sensible equipment load that is to be considered as
a return duct gain. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
% for Heating
This is the percentage of the Sensible load that is to be included when calculating
the Winter Heating Load which will be reduced by the entered percentage times
the load. If left blank none of the sensible load will be included.
Latent Equipment
Units #
2
Load #
2
Load from latent equipment in kW or Watts per m . Entered load can be positive
or negative. (Refer Table 46-52, pp.99 to 107 of DA9).
Schedule Number
As for people
% of Return
This is the percentage of the latent equipment load that is to be considered as a
return duct gain. Allowable range is 0 to 100%
Steam
Units #
2
Grams/second or Watts per m of floor area.

Load #
2
Steam load in zone in grams/second or Watts per m . Entered value must be
greater than zero. Refer p.104 of DA9.
Schedule Number
As for people
% of Return
This is the percentage of the steam load that is to be considered as a return duct
gain. Allowable range is 0 to 100%

5 Calculating, Viewing and Printing
Results
5-10 Calculate
This causes the calculations to be performed. The data however must first be
saved to a data file selected by the user. If there are no errors, the program will
proceed with the calculations with a progress bar indicating how the calculations
are proceeding. When completed the results are displayed.
5-20 The VIEW Screens

When the calculations are completed (or if there are errors) the program writes the
results out to a series of output (ASCII text) files, with the same name as the data
file, but with extensions.
OUT – Main Results
ASY – AHU Summaries
ZSS – Zones and Rooms
TLO – Load Tables
TAQ – Air Quantity Tables
AIR – Outside Air Summary
SLC – Room Load Charts
TDR – Room Temperatures
REI – Input Errors
REH – Zone Reheat
TOA – Outside Air Loads
PSY – Psychrometrics
The program then drops the user into a Screen, where the results can be viewed
and/or printed under a series of Tab Pages.
Project (refer Clause 5-30)
AHU’s (refer Clause 5-40)
Zones and Rooms (refer Clause 5-50)
Load Charts (refer Clause 5-60)
Printing (refer Clause 5-70)
Tables (refer Clause 5-80)
On the first four tab pages, check boxes allow selection of the specific results
required for viewing or printing.
The Printing Tab Page contains all the currently selected specific output in the first
four tab pages ready for printing. From here a Print Preview is available to allow the
selected results to be reviewed before printing.
The Tables pages allows the user to view load, air quantities, temperatures and
reheat tables (time and month) at AHU, zone and room level depending on the air
handling system type.
A series of radio buttons allows a selection between Chiller(s), Circuit(s), AHU(s),
Zone(s), Room(s) or Preconditioner(s).

Fig 5-20A The VIEW Screens Menu and Tool Bar
Menu Bar
The items on the Menu Bar of the View Screens are:
File
Open – Opens a set of results files. When this is selected a selection box for
the user to select the main output (.OUT) file is displayed. When a selection is
made, this loads in all the results files for this project.
Close – Closes the current set of results files
Templates – Displays the template form
Font
Fonts (including bold, italic, etc.) can be selected separately for the headings,
sub-headings etc. but these must be mono spaced fonts including Terminal,
Courier and Courier New, because of the format of the results.
The fonts that are available to you depend on the fonts you have loaded under
WINDOWS on your machine. It is therefore a matter of trial and error to obtain
the right combination on the particular machine on which you are running
CAMEL.
Main Heading – Main Page Headers
Headings – Major sub-heading on a page of results
Sub-Headings – Minor sub-heading on a page of results
Table Headings
Body Text – The text in the tables etc.
Save Text Format – Saves the font settings
Search
Find – Finds in the currently displayed results, the string that is entered in the
Find dialogue box that appears on screen (Refer Fig 5-20B)
Fig 5-20B The Find Dialogue Box

Graph – Produces graphs of the Loads and Air Quantity Tables (Refer clause 5-100)
Psychrometrics – Displays psychrometric charts (Refer clause 5-120)
Help
Tool Bar
The items on the Toolbar are:

Open – Opens a set of results files
Templates – Displays the Templates Form
Produces graphs of the Loads and Air Quantity Tables (Refer clause 5-100)

Displays psychrometric charts (Refer clause 5-120)
Exports Loads and Air Quantity Tables to Excel (Tables Tab Page only)
Help
View or Print Selection – A radio button to toggle between ‘viewing’ on screen
where only one selection at a time is allowed and ‘print selection’ which stores the
selections that are checked and dumps these results to the Print file ready for the
user to print. Note that if a Template is chosen, the selections are predefined
(see Templates below).
Template Selection List List - provides for the

selection of a template with predefined selections on the Project, AHU,
Zone and Room and Load Charts Tab Pages.
Compare results – This check box allows the user to compare the
results for two runs. When it is checked an open file button appears to open
the second file and the screen is split with a splitter bar.
Open file – allows a second file to be opened for comparison of results.
When the second file is selected it is displayed in the lower half of a split
screen with a vertical scroll bar on the right hand side.
Note that selected parts of the results can be copied to the clipboard by
clicking and dragging and then right clicking the mouse
Templates
This displays a form which allows the user to predefine the selected results that
are to be printed in the form of a series of templates. For example, for the coil
details, a user may define a template called ‘Coil Details’ and simply check the
AHU Summary check box under Project. Another template called ‘Project Details’
could have all the items under Project checked.
Fig 5-20C The Templates Form

The items on the Toolbar of the Templates form are:
Closes the Template form without saving
Clears all the checked check boxes
Help
A drop down selection list of all currently stored

templates – selection from the list enables the user to change the selections for
each Tab Page in the selected template.

Updates the current template with the selections displayed.
. - The current selections can be

saved as a new template by entering a Template name in the Save as a New
Template field and then left clicking the Save button.
To define the template, make the selections required using the checkboxes and
save as a new template or update the current template as required.
5-30 Project Results Tab Page

On this Tab Page the overall project results are presented via a series of check
boxes as follows:
Project Details – The details of this run of CAMEL including the job title outdoor design
conditions, location, etc. (Refer Fig 5-30A).
Fig 5-30A Project Details
Fig 5-30B Typical AHU / Zones / Rooms Configuration

AHU/Zones/Rooms Configuration – This provides a list of the AHU, Zones and
Rooms in the current project and any preconditioners specified. It also displays
the connections to Chillers, Boilers, Preconditioners and Circuits. If any
Preconditioners are entered, an additional table is printed for these listing the
input values for each.
AHU Summary - Cooling - This comprises two tables. The first is a summary of the
air quantities, coil capacity and psychrometrics for each AHU including any
preconditioners specified. (Refer Fig 5-30C)
On this page, an Excel button appears and when this is selected the AHU
Summary Cooling Results are exported to Excel
The second is a table of Supplementary Data that is listed for each AHU, if the
Fig 5-30C Typical AHU Summary - Cooling

time of the Peak Adjusted Sensible heat is not the same as the time of the Peak
Grand Total Heat. In CAMEL the AHU coil selection is carried out at the time of
the Peak Grand Total heat. Often the peak Adjusted Sensible Heat occurs at a
different time which means that although the coil is sized for the maximum total
heat there may not be sufficient air to handle this higher sensible load. An
example would be if the total load (GTH) occurs at 3pm February with a GTH of
40kW and an adjustable Sensible Heat of say 30 kW and at another time (say at
1pm in February) the Adjusted Sensible Heat is 31.6kW and the GTH is only
38.6kW. The table displays the required air quantity (and % increase) or the
necessary drop in the leaving coil temperature to match the higher sensible load.
If a Desiccant Humidity Control Unit is included on any Air Handling Unit or
Preconditioner Unit, 2 more tables are displayed:
The Desiccant Humidity Control Unit Summary which lists:
 the air quantity
 the design WB temperature and %RH (as entered on the Project Tab Page)
and the corresponding dry bulb temperature and specific humidity (g/kg)
 the specific humidity (g/kg) leaving the HCU at design conditions
 The User entered Fan kW
 CH or DX indicating whether the pre-cooling coil is Chilled Water or DX

The Desiccant Humidity Control Units Supplementary Data which lists:
 The moisture removal (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel at design conditions. This
is either estimated by the program or entered by the user (normally on a re-run
after selecting a particular sized unit).
 the air quantity
 the time of the peak load, the design cooling load and entering and leaving coil
conditions for the pre-cooling coil at the time of it’s peak load.
 the time of the peak load, the design cooling load and entering and leaving coil
conditions on the DX compressor serving the desiccant wheel at the time of it’s
peak load. The total heat (GTH) capacity is either estimated by the program or
entered by the user (normally on a re-run after selecting a particular sized
unit).
 the peak combined load of the pre-cooling coil, the DX coil and the AHU
cooling coil at the time of the combined load peak. This, if the supply and
outside air quantities are the same, should normally be higher than load when
an HCU unit is not used because of the heat from the HCU fan and the heating
of the desiccant wheel during the drying process.
AHU Cooling Check Figures & Heating – This provides check figures, other
miscellaneous details, the heating load, and the supply and return fan kW for
each AHU. (Refer Fig 5-30D).
On this page, an Excel button appears and when this is selected the AHU
Heating & Check Figures are exported to Excel.
Fig 5-30D Typical AHU Heating & Cooling Check Figures
Chillers, Boilers & Circuits - (Refer Fig 5-30E) This displays:

 The total chiller capacity including connected AHU, and preconditioner chilled
water coil loads, pump and pipe losses and corrections for diversified people,
lights, and equipment loads.
 The total boiler capacity including connected AHU coil loads, pump gains,
pipe losses and the provision for warm up based on the Winter Warm up %
entered on the Project Tab Page.
 For each Circuit, for cooling, the Peak GTH, the GTSensible at the time of
the peak GTH, the Time of the Peak GTH and the ambient temperature at
the time of the Peak. For Heating the GTH and ambient Wet Bulb
Temperature.
 For VR Outdoor units the average room WB during cooling and the average
room DB during cooling.

Fig 5-30E Typical Chiller, Boilers and Circuits Results
Fig 5-30F Typical Comments

Comments – This lists all the comments and non fatal errors in the results for this
project. (Refer Fig 5-30F). For a list of the comments that can appear in this list
with further explanations refer Clause 6-40.
O.A. Temperatures - This lists the cooling outdoor design temperatures used by the
program either for the location selected or if the user has entered the 3pm design
conditions the calculated values by the entered yearly and daily range. Note that
in the latter case CAMEL does not calculate values for the winter months
(because the yearly range corrections in DA9 do not include corrections for these
months). Refer fig. 5-30G.

Fig 5-30G Typical O.A. Temperatures
Window Shading Effectiveness
The program calculates the effectiveness of the shading on each window as:
1- (the sum of the solar loads through the window with shading)
(the sum of the solar loads through the window with no shading)
over 24 hours for the three summer months (Dec, Jan, Feb in the Southern
Hemisphere and June, July, Aug in the Northern Hemisphere) expressed as a
percentage. The program also calculates the equivalent depth of an overhang at
the top of the windows (with an extension to the left and right the same as the
overhang depth) that gives the same effectiveness as the entered shading on
each surface.
For further details refer to the Window Shading Effectiveness at the end of clause
3-20.
Fig 5-30H Window Shading Effectiveness and Equivalent Overhang

Input Project Data – This lists the part of the data input file associated with the Project
Screens:- Project, Schedules, Shading, Windows, Walls, Chiller & Boiler and
Preconditioners.
5-40 AHU Results Tab Page

This Tab Page provides check boxes for calling up the cooling and heating loads
psychrometric details and check figures for each AHU selectively.
Fig 5-40A Typical AHU Cooling Psychrometrics

Below the toolbar is the checkbox panel. On the left hand side of this panel is the
AHU selection list. A selection can be made here by left clicking (single
selection), Cntrl left clicking (multiple selection) and Shift left click (selection from
the single selection down to the current cursor position).
Fig 5-40B Typical AHU Cooling Load Chart

Fig 5-40C Typical AHU Heating Psychrometrics and Load Chart
The check boxes on this Tab Page are:
Cooling Psychrometrics - This displays the maximum cooling load, the air quantities,
the detailed psychrometrics and check figures etc. for the selected AHU’s. (Refer
Fig 5-40A).
Cooling Load Chart - This is the cooling load chart for the AHU coil ie. the sum of the
zone/room sensible and latent heats plus the outdoor air and return duct gains for
the selected AHU’(s). The Room load charts which detail the loads through
walls, windows, etc. in each room, are in the Load Charts Tab Page. (Fig 5-40B).
The item labeled Total of % RA to Room is the sum of all the % to R/A loads entered in
the External Tab Page and the Internal Tab Page for all rooms on this AHU. The
remainder of the load for each external wall or roof and each internal load is included into
the Room Load Charts, with the percentage shown in a column headed ROOM.
Heating Psychrometrics and Load Chart - This displays the winter heating load chart
for the AHU heating Coil for the selected AHU'(s) including the sum of the
zone/room fabric heating loads (including infiltration less any "% Heating" for
people, lights and equipment entered on the Internal Tab Page) plus the outdoor
air sensible load as well as the heating psychrometrics. (Refer Fig 5-40C) A
provision for extra capacity for warm up is shown (calculated as detailed in clause
7-150) unless the coil is connected to the boiler in which case the extra capacity is
only added to the boiler.
Outside Air - This displays the details of the entered outside air (units and values) (as
stipulated on the AHU Coil or Zones and Room Tab Pages) and corresponding
value in l/s or % of S/A for each AHU, zone and room together with the
calculated AHU and room outside air values and percentages of supply air.
These calculated quantities include the AS1668-2012 multiple compartment
calculations if requested (on the AHU Tab Page) (Refer fig. 5-40D). Also listed is
any amount of outdoor air that is injected directly into the room rather than
through the AHU. The floor area and number of people are also listed for
checking purposes.
Extracted and Spill Air Summary
This table which follows on from the Outside Air Summary Table, displays for
each selected AHU(s) and each of the zones and rooms on the selected AHU(s):
 The AHU and Zone number, and the AHU, zone and room title.
 The extracted air quantity
 The AHU number and Room title to where the extracted air is spilled to
 Spill Into L/s – the total air quantity spilled from other rooms into the current
room. In calculating the spill into value, account is taken of the number off

spaces, so, for example if 100 l/s is spilled from a single space into a space
with 4 off, the spill in will be 25 l/s
Fig 5-40D Typical Outside Air Summary and Extracted and Spill Air Summary
Input Data (incl Zones and Rooms) - displays the input data file for the AHU, Zones
and Rooms by each AHU.
5-50 Zones and Rooms Results Tab Page
On this page, an Excel button appears and when this is selected the
selected Results are exported to Excel
AHU selection list. A selection can be made here by left clicking (single
single selection down to current cursor position).
The results in each table include a line for each AHU, each zone (if there is more
than one) in each AHU and each room (if there is more than one) in each zone.
The checkboxes on this Tab Page are:
Cooling Results
This is a table containing for each selected AHU:
 The adjusted sensible and latent (room sensible or latent plus supply duct
gains) at the respective peak load times (listed under cooling check figures) of

Fig 5-50A Typical Zones and Rooms Cooling Results
the AHU, zone and room., ie the zone and room loads excluding outside air and
return duct gains.
 Supply and Outside air quantities. For constant volume systems, the zone air
quantity is that required at the time of the peak zone Grand Total Heat and
the AHU air quantity is the sum of the zone air quantities. For VAV systems
the zone air quantity is that required at the time of the Peak Adjusted Room
Sensible Heat and the AHU air quantity is the sum of the air quantities
required at the time of the peak AHU Adjusted Sensible Heat.
For each zone, the zone peak air quantity is apportioned to each room by the
ratio of either the room peak loads or floor area (as selected by the user).
For example in a VAV system: - assume the peak load for a zone serving two
rooms occurs at noon and the first room’s peak load occurs at 10AM whilst
the peak load occurs for the second at 3PM. Assume now that the air quantity
for the zone at the time of its peak is 1000l/s and the proportions for each
room based on the ratio of the room peak loads are 550 l/s for room 1 and
450 l/s for room 2. Assume now at the time of the peak load for room 1
(10AM) the zone air quantity based on the zone load at this time is 800 l/s.
The air quantity to room 1 will be ( 550/1000 x 800 ) 440 l/s and room 1 will
nd
be under supplied with air Similarly if the zone air quantity at the time of the 2
room peak is 700 l/s the air quantity to room 2 would be 450/1500 x 700 = 315
l/s. For a Constant Volume system the air quantities will be fixed at all times
at 550 and 450 l/s but since the proportion of the loads varies inevitably,
although the average room temperature will be held at design conditions, the
individual rooms will deviate, one higher, the other lower. This is what
happens when thermally dissimilar rooms are connected to one zone.
The result is that the temperatures will not be maintained at the entered room
temperature and this can be viewed in the Tables or under Graph under
Room temperatures
 VAV Turn Down % - The minimum turn down ratio for each Mixing Boxes
(zone) in a VAV system. The turn down is based on the turn down % entered
(on the zones and rooms tab) or the default value (40%) only those hours
calculated by CAMEL (ie. the hottest day in each month) assuming the box will
not turn down less than the specified minimum supply air quantity or the
specified outside air for the particular zone.
 This is an estimate of the amount of reheat required depending on whether

“with Reset” was selected on the AHU Screen or not
The way in which the reheat is calculated each hour for each zone is as
follows:
Without reset:
Add the zone total room sensible heat divided by (1.2 times the zone air
quantity) to the leaving coil temperature to determine the average room
temperature for this zone without reheat (T1). The reheat is then the
zone supply air quantity multiplied by 1.2 times the difference between the
entered room design temperature and temperature T1.
With reset:
For each zone, determine (using the calculated zone supply air) which
zone requires the lowest leaving coil temperature. Then determine the
reheat in each zone as above using this revised leaving coil temperature.
Note that this “estimate” of reheat may not be the maximum required. Room
loads at other times could easily give higher values, e.g. if all the internal loads
in one particular room are off and all the people leave, when other rooms are
on full cooling. In theory then the reheat capacity required could then be the
total room internal load.
 An estimate of the Maximum and Minimum room dry bulb. The zone or room
temperatures will differ from the AHU temperature when for example a
number of rooms are served by a single cooling coil (single zone Heating and
Cooling). This estimate of temperature is based on the room load at specified
room conditions and the design Air Quantity without any adjustment because
of the change in room sensible load due to the change in room temperature.
 The room RH (at the time of the peak load of the AHU).
Cooling Check Figures
Fig 5-50B Typical Zones and Rooms Cooling Check Figures.

This is a table of check figures for the cooling load calculations. It also includes
the floor area, the room volume and a column headed AQ MUL(tiplier).
The A.Q.MUL is an indication of the relative extent that the dehumidified air
quantity had to be increased to satisfy the minimum specified. If it is 1.0 there is
no correction required for this room, zone or air handling unit however the air
quantities for this specific room, zone or the air handling unit may have needed to
be increased to satisfy increases required by other rooms or zones on this air
handling unit. The room with the highest A.Q. Multiplier is the one that had the

most impact. For further details see 7-40 Minimum Air Quantity Calculation.
Heating Results and Check Figures
Fig 5-50C Typical Zones and Rooms Heating Results & Check Figures
This is a table containing for each selected AHU:
 The AHU, zone and room Fabric (heating) kW.
 The supply air quantity for heating. For a constant air volume system this is
equal to the cooling air quantity while for a VAV system it is the minimum air
quantity for each zone with the room air apportioned as for cooling.
 The estimated room dry bulb temperature. The room dry bulb will invariably
differ from the zone design temperature (shown in the table on the AHU line)
due to the differing proportion of outside air and heating load.
 The Total (heating) kW i.e. the Fabric kW plus the outside air heating load
apportioned on the basis of the heating supply air quantity. The value for the
zone is the coil capacity required when the reheat coil is to be used for winter
heating rather than a central heating coil.
 A series of heating check figures - Air Changes per hour, watts/cub.m. and
watts/ sq.m.
Combined Results
In this table, for the selected AHU, the more significant results for each AHU,
Zones and Rooms are listed. The quantities listed include:
 The floor area
 The AHU cooling Grand Total Heat and W/m
2
For each AHU, Zone and Room:

 The cooling adjusted Sensible heat and W/m .
2
 The Supply Air and OutsideAir quantities (l/s) and l/s/m

2
 For the AHU the percentage of Outside Air and leaving cooling coil dry bulb
temperature
 For each AHU, zone and room, the number of people
 For each AHU, zone and room, the heating load (kW) and W/m
2
Selected parts of the results can be copied by clicking and dragging and then right
clicking the mouse

Fig 5-50D Typical Zones and Rooms Combined Results
5-60 Room Load Charts Tab Page

Room selection list. A selection can be made here by left clicking (single
single selection down to current cursor position).
Fig 5-60A Typical Room Cooling Load Chart

The check boxes on this Tab Page are:
Cooling Load Chart (refer Fig 5-60A)

This is the detailed cooling load chart for the selected rooms. It includes the
solar, conduction, internal etc. loads with details of the user input items, and
values such as storage load factors extracted from tables stored in the program
so that the user can check in detail each load in the load chart. It does not include
outside air loads, supply duct gains etc. which are AHU coil loads. The load chart
includes room sensible, room latent, etc. sub-totals and the room total sensible
and latent loads and the grand total heat for the room. It does not include outside
air and return duct gains. These are added in the AHU Cooling Load Chart (refer
fig. 5-40B)
The following items of the cooling load chart require further description:
Solar Gain Glass

2
The value printed in brackets after this heading is the storage mass in kg/m used
in determining storage effects.
The # number at the beginning of each line is the external surface number. The
dew point correction factor included on each line is calculated by the program.
Under SUN is listed:
ON for the area of glass that s in SUN
SHADE for the area of glass that is shaded when the sun is on the fascade
OFF for the whole window when the sun is off the fascade, the solar gain then
being the solar gain due to diffuse radiation plus stred heat from previous hours
Solar and Transmission gains - Walls and Roof

The # number at the beginning of each line is the external surface number.
Lights
The two values printed in brackets after lights are the light type and the storage
2
mass in kg/m used in determining the storage effects.
Mixed and Return Air By-pass Adjustment

When a return air by-pass (RET) or a mixed air bypass (MIX) is nominated the
transfer of load to the leaving side of the apparatus by the by-pass air is shown in
the load chart as Return or Mixed air bypass adjustment.
Heating Load Chart (refer Fig 5-60B)

This displays the winter heating room load chart ie. the fabric load plus infiltration load
Fig 5-60B Typical Room Heating Load Chart

Fig 5-60C Typical Data Reiteration for Room
for the selected room(s). If a “% for Heating” has been entered for any of the internal
loads, then these percentage loads are deducted, thereby reducing the total heating
load. If the total heating load is, as a consequence, negative, then there is no net
winter heating load. Note the total heating load chart (which includes the O/A load) for
the AHU serving this zone is shown on the AHU Tab page. (Refer Fig 5-40C)
Data Reiteration (refer Fig 5-60C)

This is a detailed list of all input data that is not included in the room load charts.
5-70 Printing Results Tab Page

In this Tab Page the selected results can be viewed before printing and page
breaks can be inserted. All items that are checked on the four Tab Pages to the
left of this one are automatically loaded into the Printing Tab Page together with a
CAMEL banner page on the first screen.
Note that selected parts of the results can be copied to the clipboard by
clicking and dragging and then right clicking the mouse
The Menu Bar

The items on the Menu Bar of the Printing Tab Pages are:
File
Open - Opens a set of results files. When this is selected a selection box for
the user to select the main output (.OUT) file is displayed. When a
selection is made, this loads in all the results files for this project.
Close - Closes the current set of results files
Font
Sets fonts for the headings, text, etc.
Search
Find - Finds in the currently displayed results, the string that is entered in the
Find dialogue box that appears on screen
Find Next F3 - Finds the next occurrence of the string
Help

Fig. 5-70A The Printing Tab Page ToolBar
The Tool Bar

Print - opens a Print Preview Screen where the layout of the compiled results
file can be previewed, printed or exported to Word or to a HTML fie.
Help
Below the Toolbar are two additional items for controlling the results file printout:
This is a slidebar that controls the left margin on the page.

Checking this check box causes Page Breaks to be
inserted at intervals as defined by the Lines per Page or at specific locations
defined by the user. If Page Breaks at specific locations only are required,
the number of lines per page is set to blank.
This controls the number of lines per page for custom
page breaks.
The user can enter their own specific Page Breaks or delete existing Page Breaks
by locating the cursor on the desired line or existing page break and then right
clicking the mouse. Note however that if you return to the Project, AHU,
Zones and Rooms or Load Charts Tab Pages and make new selections, all
user defined specific page breaks will be lost once you make any new
selections of the results.
Print Preview
Fig. 5-70B The Print Preview Toolbars

On this Screen the user can preview the Results before sending to the printer.
Items on the First Toolbar
Close and return to the Printing Tab Page

Help
Provides for exporting the Results File

to an MS Word RTF format or Internet HTML format file. If the file is
exported to MS Word RTF, the program Word is opened and the file is
loaded ready for the user to edit or add other text (such as a report), etc.
Items on the Second Toolbar - for Print Previewing
Page control ie. which page(s) to be displayed
Zoom the current page implemented by successive clicking with the

left mouse.
Zoom Page - A selection from:
Whole Page - displays full page on screen
Page Width - full screen width for current page.
Two Pages (on Screen)
Multi Page - from n to last, where n is the current page set in Page
Control above 150%, 100%, 75%, 50% or 25%
Note that double left clicking the mouse zooms in on the selected page and
double right clicking the mouse zooms out on the selected page
Send to Printer - this sends the file to the printer, opening the WINDOWS
Printer dialogue box and enabling the user to print the whole file, the current
page, or set other printing options.
5-80 Table Results Tab Page
Fig 5-80A Table Results Showing Typical Table of GTH for an AHU
This Tab Page provides for displaying and printing any of the tables of results.
The tables comprise loads, air quantities, room temperatures and reheat
quantities. Selection is made by selecting the Table and Type required via a
series of radio buttons on the left of the display and then selecting the Chiller,
Circuit, AHU, Zone, Room or Preconditioner as appropriate from the selection list
below. Only one table can be viewed and printed at a time and the printing is
independent of the Print Results Tab Page ie. selected tables are not dumped to
the Print Results file. The Tables can however be exported to Excel.
File
Open - Opens a set of results files. When this is selected a selection box for
the user to select the main output (.OUT) file is displayed. When a
selection is made, this loads in all the results files for this project.
Close - Closes the current set of results files
Font - Sets fonts for the headings, text, etc.
Save Text Format – Saves the font settings
Search
Find – Finds in the currently displayed results, the string that is entered in the
Find dialogue box that appears on screen (Refer Fig 5-20B)
Graph – Produces graphs of the Loads and Air Quantity Tables (Refer clause 5-100)
Psychrometrics – Displays psychrometric charts (Refer clause 5-120)
Help

Print - Prints the table currently displayed.
Produces graphs of the Loads and Air Quantity Tables (Refer clause 5-100)
Displays psychrometric charts (Refer clause 5-120)
This exports the current table(s) on screen into Microsoft Excel
Help
To the left of the display is three panels
Tables – a selection from
Chiller - Tables for Chiller
Circuits - Tables of cooling GTH for any Circuits entered
AHU - Tables for the Air Handling Units
Zone - Tables for all the Zones
Rooms - Tables for all the Rooms
HCU - Tables for the Desiccant Humidity Control Units
Precon
Humidity - Tables for the Humidity Controlled Pre-conditioners
Temp - Tables for the Temperature Controlled Pre-conditioners
Type
The type of table is also required and this is selected on the Type panel
Chiller- Cooling G.T.Heat
Circuit- Cooling G.T.Heat for selected circuit
AHU - Cooling coil for selected AHU:
G.T.Heat, G.T.Sensible Heat and G.T.Latent Heat,
the Sum of the Room Adjustable Sensible and Latent heats,
the Supply Air quantities (VAV systems only) and
the Outside Air Sensible and Latent Heat
Zone - the Sum of the Room Adjustable Sensible and Latent heats for the
selected Zone,
- Reheat values (kW) (Reheat systems only)
The values for reheat will depend on whether the leaving cooling coil
temperature is reset (nominated on the AHU screen to the right of the
System Type). With no reset, reheat will be required whenever the
cooling capacity exceeds the cooling load. With reset, reheat will only be
required if the required air quantity is less than the specified minimum or
the outside air quantity, whichever is the greater.
Room - the Room Adjustable Sensible and Latent heats for the selected Room.
- the Supply Air quantities (VAV systems only)
- the Room temperature
- the Room Relative humidity
HCU (connected to a single HCU)
CW Precooling Coil
- G.T.Heat, G.T.Sensible Heat and G.T.Latent Heat of the selected HCU.
DX Coil
- G.T.Heat, G.T.Sensible Heat and G.T.Latent Heat of the selected HCU.
- (AHU+HCU), the combined Grand Total Heat of the selected HCU
(Desiccant and Pre-cooling coils) and the cooling coil of the AHU
connected to this HCU.
- the moisture removal (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel in the selected HCU.
- the leaving specific humidity of the selected HCU (g/kg)
- the percentage of time in each hour that the selected HCU is operating. If
this is less than 100% then the HCU is cycling and if it is zero the
desiccant wheel in the HCU is not operating.
Precon
Humid – Humidity Controlled Preconditioners
Same tables as those for a HCU connected to a single HCU except that for
AHU+HCU the values are for the combined Grand Total Heat of the

selected Preconditioner (Desiccant and Pre-cooling coils) and the cooling
coils of ALL the AHUs connected to this Preconditioner.
Temp – Temperature Controlled Preconditioners
G.T.Heat, G.T.Sensible Heat and G.T.Latent Heat of the cooling coil in the
selected temperature controlled preconditioner.
5-90 Errors
If there are errors when the calculation program attempts to read the input file or if
there are errors in the calculations that cause the program to abort, a list of the
errors is displayed on the Printing Tab Page. (refer Fig. 5-90A). The list details the
AHU, Zones and Rooms in the Project with a description of each error that has
been encountered or the message DATA CHECK OK if there has been no errors
on a particular AHU, zone or room. The list can be printed with or without page
breaks as for the normal results.
For a detailed list of the ERRORS and comments on the errors refer Chapter 4.0
Fig 5-90A Errors Displayed
5-100 Graphing the Load and Air Quantity Tables

This screen provides for graphing of the Tabular results from CAMEL.
The Graph Screen is accessed from the menu or tool bar on the MAIN Screen. In
this Screen the required graphs are set up, annotated, viewed and printed. On
entering the GRAPH Screen, CAMEL opens the “current project” but any other
project may be opened.
In the GRAPH Screen:
The menu bar and tool bar contains:
Close - closes the GRAPH Screen

Open - Allows the user to open a another set of project table
Help
Save – Save the graph colours

To the left of the display is five panels
Tables – a selection from
Chiller - Tables for Chiller
Circuits - Tables for Circuits
AHU - Tables for the Air Handling Units
Zone - Tables for all the Zones
Rooms - Tables for all the Rooms
Precon - Tables for the Preconditioners
Type – a selection from:
GTHeat - Grand total heat (Chiller, AHU or Preconditioners)
GTSens - Grand total sensible heat (AHU only)
GTLat - Grand total latent heat (AHU only)
AdjSens - Room sensible heats. This is the sensible load without outside air
and return duct gains. (AHU, Zone or Room)
AdjLat - Room latent heat. This is the latent load without outside air and
return duct gains. (AHU, Zone or Room)
SAirQ - Supply Air quantities (VAV systems only)
OASens - Outside Sensible Heat (AHU only)
OALat - Outside Latent Heat (AHU only)
Temp - Room temperatures (Room only)
Reheat (Reheat systems only)
With Reset - Estimated Reheat quantities when the leaving coil temperature is
reset to that required for the room with the highest percentage load.
No Reset - Estimated Reheat quantities when the leaving coil temperature is
maintained constant at all times.
Fig. 5-100A Typical CAMEL Graph showing Zone Loads v Time.
Circuit, AHU, Zone, Room or Preconditioner - This is a selection list for the AHU(s),
Zone(s), Room(s) or Preconditioner(s).
To compare values between different Circuits, AHUs, Zones, Rooms or

Preconditioner(s), the user selects the AHUs, Zones, Rooms or Preconditioners
required and a particular (single) Month.
If a single Circuit, AHU, Zone, Room or Preconditioner is selected then any
number of months can be selected.
Multiple Selection
To select more than one Circuit, AHU, Zone, Room or Preconditioner from the list
 if they are in sequence hold the mouse down and move over selection.
 if they are scattered select holding Ctrl key down.
Month – This allows the user to select either one or a number of months. If a single Circuit, AHU,
Zone, Room or Precon is selected then any number of months can be selected. If more than one is
selected, only one month can be used.
Units - This allows the user to select the units for the values plotted on the graph.
The units available are:

2
With air quantities - L/s or L/s/m of floor area.

2 2
With heat loads -Watts or W/m of floor area. Per m is useful when one zone
is significantly larger in area (and hence presumably loads and air quantities)
than another. It normalises the chart on the basis of area.
On the graph itself a toolbar allows the user to set up the style of graph, the graph
legends, etc. and to print the graph.
The buttons on the toolbar are:
Import Chart
Export Chart
Copy to the clipboard as a bitmap. This allows the user to export the chart
into another document e.g. a report being prepared on a word processor.
Copy the data to the clipboard as text.
Print - prints the chart
Select graph type
Change colours on graph
Toggles to 3D
Rotates the chart in 3D
Zoom allows magnification by selecting the area on the chart with the mouse
Toggles vertical grid lines on the chart
Toggles horizontal grid lines on the chart
Allows the user to edit the chart titles
Fonts - sets font for selected items
Tools - pop up allows user to edit and change the legend
Graph options - pop up allows user to change the shape colour and size of
points, show values on the chart, scale the axis and much more.
The legend - This by default appears at the base of the chart but can be moved
to any other position or made floating by dragging and dropping. If the legend is
floating it does not get printed when the chart is printed.

5-110 Viewing Shadows on Walls and Roofs
Fig. 5-110A Typical Shadows from an overhang and an adjacent building on an External Surface.
In this screen, the user can view the shadow patterns from shading devices on
any selected external surface entered in the External Tab Page. The shadows
from the shading devices and adjacent shading can be animated so they traverse
the selected wall or roof. The screen display is driven by a control panel at the
bottom of the screen (refer Figure 5-110A) whilst the particular surface and room
are selected from drop down lists at the top of the screen. The functions are: -
On the tool bar:

Print - prints the current screen
Save - saves the current colours and styles
Copy chart to clipboard
Save chart as a bitmap – file name entered on form.
Room - drop down list for selecting the Room
Surface No - drop down list for selecting the surface No. of the Room
On the Control Panel:
Display - this controls what is displayed
 Oblique - This switches between a front elevation and an oblique projection
to enable the overhangs and reveals to be viewed. It also shows adjacent
shading objects in oblique projection.
Shading devices - This allows the shading devices overhangs, reveals and/or
adjacent shading, and their shadows to be selectively turned on or off.
 Overhangs
 Reveals

 Adjacent
Colours and Styles - this allows the user to select the colours of:
Walls, Windows, Shades and Shadows and the:
 Shadow Style - This switches the shadow on the wall or roof between
outline (wire frame), Solid or Hatched.
 Overhangs Hatched - The overhangs can be shown hatched or just
outlined (reveals are always shown in wire frame). If an overhang or drop
factor applies then the overhang or drop will be hatched differently (more
open) to indicate that it is partially transparent.
South/North Hemisphere
 Latitude - Displays the project latitude
 Altitude - solar altitude at time displayed
 Azimuth - solar azimuth at time displayed
 Month and Time - This allows the user to select a month and time at which
the shadow pattern is to be displayed. The time can be selected using the
scroll bar immediately below. Either Time or Month can be made to cycle
using the animate button the value of the other option being as selected.
Zoom - Zooms in and out
Animate -
 Day / Year
 Speed - changes speed of animation
By selecting Day, the shadow patterns will be cycled throughout the hours of the
day for the selected month and while this is running the month can be altered by
clicking on the month (to bring up the list) and then using the up and down arrow
keys. By selecting Year, the shadow patterns will be cycled through the months at
the nominated time.
5-120 Psychrometric Charts

This provides a plot of the cooling process on a psychrometric chart for each
AHU.
Exit - exits this screen
Open - Pop up dialogue box for selection of .PSY (CAMEL psychrometric)
file to be plotted
Help - Help on this Screen
The items on the Tool Bar at the top of the screen are:

Fig 5-120A Typical Psychrometric Chart Screen
Print - prints the current screen

Save Colours - saves the current colours
Save picture as a bitmap – file name entered on form
Copy Chart to the Clipboard - copies the chart to the clipboard as a bitmap,
so that it can be pasted into another application eg. Into a report. The
bitmap contains only the portion shown on the screen.
Data Points - Displays the numerical values of the points on the

psychrometric chart in a floating window.
Help
AHU selection drop down list - enables

the user to select which AHU is required for the psychrometrics. The up
and down arrow keys provides a convenient way of stepping through the zones.
The items on the Tool Bar under the chart are:
Grid Colour - change the colour of all the psychrometric grid lines.
Label Colour - change the colour of all labels
Background Colour - change the colour of the background

Dry Bulb - toggles dry bulb lines on and off
Wet Bulb - toggles wet bulb lines on and off
Moisture - toggles the moisture content lines on and off
RH - toggles RH lines on and off
Data - toggles the psychrometric process lines on and off
Labels - toggles the graph labels on and off
Zoom - zooms in and out.

6 Data Checking and Error Messages
6-10 Data Checking
The data entry part of CAMEL performs a range of data checks including range
checks on individual items and consistency checks between items on the same
and in some cases different screens.
When the calculations are performed similar data checks are also carried out.
These were in the original FORTRAN CAMEL program (now called CAMCALC)
but have been left in as a safety feature. In addition other error messages can be
generated during the calculations.
All errors produced by CAMCALC are listed in the file .REI which is displayed
(refer clause 5-90) after CAMCALC is run.
6-20 Error Messages

The calculation part of the program (CAMCALC) produces two types of error
messages. These are:
 Fatal errors which prevent the calculations from proceeding. These are
usually due to errors in the input data.
 Non-fatal errors which do not cause the run to terminate, but indicate that the
program has had to adjust some items of input or that the results produced
should be treated cautiously.
6-30 Errors that cause the Calculations to Fail - (Fatal Errors)

Provided users eliminate all the errors picked up with the frowning red faces in the
data entry phase, then they will not normally be required to familiarise themselves
with the fatal errors that occur in the calculation phase.
The fatal errors produced by CAMCALC, except in a few special cases, are each
prefixed with the words INPUT DATA ERROR followed by the name of the screen
or the field which caused the error and the details of the error. Where the error
does not relate to a specific item, a more detailed description of the error is
printed. The fatal errors are of three types:
Specific Item Checks

Individual numeric items entered are checked to ensure that they lie within the
range allowed. If the value lies outside the allowable range a specific error
message is printed similar to the following:
INPUT DATA ERROR –AHU SCREEN: SUMMER CDB OUTSIDE RANGE OF
10.0 TO 50.0
Cross Checks
A similar type of error message is printed if an item that is required because of
another entered item is omitted, e.g. if a window type is entered in the External
Tab Page but the window type is omitted in the WINDOWS Tab Page.
Run Time Errors

These errors occur during the calculations and produce quite specific error
messages.

All of the fatal errors explicitly explain the nature of the error such that the user
should be able to easily identify the problem if they do occur.
The Specific Item and Cross Check errors should only occur in CAMCALC if the
red smiley face errors in CAMEL are ignored and if any of these errors appear
when viewing the results file the user should check the zone summary screen for
any red faces.
6-40 Errors or Comments that do not Cause Calculations to

Fail - (Non-Fatal Errors)
Most of these are regarded as being unlikely to have a major affect on the
program results or are a warning to the user that there is something unusual.
Some however are very important as they indicate that the program could not find
a solution based on the input data provided. They are listed immediately under
the particular zone heading on the comments page.
The following comments occur when the results are either invalid or very likely
invalid and the results are for data checking only.
 *** THE 'FOGGING' APPARATUS NOMINATED RESULTS IN A LEAVING CONDITION
WITH A RELATIVE HUMIDITY GREATER THAN 100% AT THE REVISED ENTERING
CONDITIONS. THE OUTPUT IS FOR DATA CHECKING ONLY. ***
 ***THE PROGRAM ASSUMES THAT PLANT PERFORMANCE CAN BE
APPROXIMATED BY ASSUMING THAT LEAVING %RH DETERMINED FOR THE
NOMINATED CAPACITY IS MAINTAINED CONSTANT OVER A LIMITED RANGE.
THE PLANT NOMINATED RESULTS IN THESE LIMITS BEING EXCEEDED AND
HENCE RESULTS ARE LIKELY TO BE INVALID *** (Refer Clause 7-60).
 ***THE PROGRAM WAS UNABLE TO DETERMINE A SOLUTION FOR THIS
NOMINATED FRACTION OF OUTSIDE AIR. THIS DOES NOT MEAN A SOLUTION
DOES NOT EXIST. THE OUTPUT PRODUCED IS FOR DATA CHECKING. ***
 ***TO MAINTAIN THE SPECIFIED ROOM DRY BULB TEMPERATURE THE
APPARATUS REQUIRES AN ADDITIONAL x% GRAND TOTAL SENSIBLE HEAT
CAPACITY. THE OUTPUT PRODUCED, WHICH ASSUMES THIS ADDITIONAL
GRAND TOTAL SENSIBLE HEAT CAPACITY IS AVAILABLE, IS FOR DATA
CHECKING PURPOSES AND TO ENABLE BETTER PLANT SELECTION TO BE
MADE FOR A RE-RUN OF THIS PROGRAM. *** (Refer Clause 7-60).
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: ALL COOLING LOADS WERE NEGATIVE OR ZERO, LOAD
CHART IS PRINTED FOR INPUT DATA CHECKING ONLY.
Other errors occur during the running of the program which do not make the
results invalid and the messages are printed under Comments in the “Project”
Results. The following lists these messages and describes the action taken by
the program to continue with the calculations. These messages should be read
very carefully by the user when they appear.
 *** THE DEHUMIDIFIED AIR IS GREATER THAN THE SUPPLY AIR QUANTITY.
FOR A MIXED BYPASS SYSTEM, DUMPBACK IS NOT ALLOWED WITH ADP OR
LEAVING COIL CONDITION FIXED. SUPPLY AIR HAS BEEN INCREASED TO
AVOID DUMPBACK. ***
 *** THE DEHUMIDIFIED AIR IS GREATER THAN THE SUPPLY AIR QUANTITY.
FOR A RETURN BYPASS SYSTEM, DUMPBACK IS NOT ALLOWED. SUPPLY AIR
HAS BEEN INCREASED TO AVOID DUMPBACK. ***
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: AT LEAST ONE WALL HAS THE SAME LABEL AS THE
STD TYPE. STD TYPE WITH THE SAME LABEL HAS BEEN IGNORED.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: BY-PASS FACTOR HIGH, IN THE RANGE 0.6 TO 1.0
YOU MUST HAVE HOLES IN YOUR COIL.

 INPUT DATA COMMENT: OUTSIDE AIR QUANTITY AND RETURN DUCT GAINS
ENTERED MAY LEAD TO UNREALISTIC RETURN AIR CONDITIONS. RETURN
GAINS ARE INCLUDED IN THE LOAD BUT IGNORED IN THE PSYCHROMETRICS.
With low return air quantity, return duct gains will have a significant effect on the
temperature rise in the return air duct.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: INSUFFICIENT INFORMATION TO DO
PSYCHROMETRICS. CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON MINIMUM LEAVING COIL
DRY BULB.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: LEFT AND/OR RIGHT REVEAL IS ABOVE OR BELOW
WINDOW. This is a check for the user as it is possibly (but not necessarily) an error.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: LOCATION OF ADJACENT SHADING DOES NOT MAKE
'L' SHAPED BLDG. This is a check for the user as it is possibly (but not necessarily)
an error.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: NO ROOF, CEILING OR FLOOR ENTERED FOR THIS
ZONE. This is a check for the user as it is possibly (but not necessarily) an error.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: OVERHANG IS BELOW WINDOW. This is a check for the
user as it is possibly (but not necessarily) an error.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: OVERHANGS OVERLAP. This is a check for the user as
it is possibly (but not necessarily) an error.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: RETURN DUCT GAINS HAVE BEEN ENTERED WITH AN
ALL OUTSIDE AIR PLANT: PROGRAM IGNORES RDHG, RDLG AND RDEG. In
an all outside air plant, there is no return air and hence no return duct gains.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: ROOF SURFACE DENSITY ENTERED IS OUTSIDE
RANGE, PROGRAM ASSUMES VALUE OF LOWER OR UPPER RANGE LIMIT. For
roof in sun or in shade and with the Light Weight Roof ETD’s check box on the
2
WALLS Tab Page checked, the range of surface density is 10 to 300 kg/ m . For roof
in sun or in shade without the Light Weight Roof ETD’s check box checked and for all
2
water covered or sprayed roofs the range is 100 to 300 kg/ m . For values entered
outside these ranges the program assumes the limiting value.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: ROOM DESIGN TEMPERATURE IS OUTSIDE RANGE
OF DATA FOR HEAT GAIN FROM PEOPLE: PROGRAM ASSUMES VALUE OF 20
OR 28. When room design dry bulb is outside range of values in Table 45 of Design
Manual - DA9 program assumes value of 20C or 28C for calculation of heat gains
from people.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: STORAGE MASS ENTERED IS OUTSIDE RANGE OF
2
150 TO 700 kg/m . PROGRAM ASSUMES A VALUE OF 150 OR 700. In
determining thermal storage effects for windows and/or lights the program extracts
values from Tables 6 to 11 in the Design Manual - DA9 for storage mass values
2
within the range of 150 to 700 kg/m . For values entered outside this range program
assumes limiting values.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: SUPPLY AIR IS LESS THAN ENTERED OUTSIDE AIR.
HENCE S/AIR SET EQUAL TO F/AIR AND BYPASS FACTOR IGNORED.
 INPUT DATA COMMENT: WALL SURFACE DENSITY ENTERED IS OUTSIDE
2
RANGE OF 100 to 700 kg/m ; PROGRAM ASSUMES VALUE OF 100 OR 700. In
determining equivalent temperature difference for walls the program extracts values
from Table 21 in the Design Manual - DA9 for mass of wall per unit area values within
2
the range 100 to 700 kg/m . For values outside this range program assumes limiting
values.

7 Technical Description
In this section the technicalities of some of the special features of the program are
described. The methods used for determining heating and cooling loads and the
associated psychrometrics are as described in the Application Manual DA9
however numerous extensions have been made to the methods and they are
described in the clauses below.
7-10 Heating and Cooling Loads

The cooling load is calculated for each hour of a design day in each month.
Only one heating load is calculated for specified outdoor and indoor design
conditions with internal and solar loads being ignored.
To simplify the input data required and consequently make the program easier to
use, winter 'U' values are calculated from the entered summer 'U' values. The
summer 'U' values are corrected for internal and external film coefficients, the film
coefficients being as stated in the Application Manual - DA9. (Table 24 to 36)
Winter U values for heating are calculated as follows (R = 1 / U value):
The R value for winter = the R value for summer
minus the outside summer film R value minus the inside summer film R value
plus the outside winter film R value plus the inside winter film R value
where (from DA9):
the outside summer film R value is 0.044 (3.5m/s wind speed)
the outside winter film R value is 0.03 (7.0m/s wind speed)
the inside summer film R value for vertical surfaces is 0.12 (still air)
the inside winter film R value for vertical surfaces is 0.12 (still air)
the inside summer film R value for horizontal surfaces (heat flow down) is
0.162 (still air)
the inside winter film R value for horizontal surfaces (heat flow up) is 0.107
(still air)
For Floors and Ceilings on the Partitions Tab Page the R value is adjusted for the
change from heat flow up to down and visa-a-versa and for vertical Partitions
there is no change.
The winter 'U' values so determined are accurate except when the summer 'U'
values input by the user are for components which:
 contain an air gap;
 contain reflective sheeting;
 are neither horizontal nor vertical e.g. pitched roof.
The error introduced by the approximations for these components is generally
small.
The method used is generally conservative and if necessary manual adjustments
can be made to the heating load output.
7-20 Outside air Quantity and Conditions

Outside air quantity can be specified as:
 a fixed quantity; or
 an air change rate; or
 as a fraction of supply air.
 as an air quantity per person.

 as an air quantity per square metre of floor area.
When specified as a fraction, a fixed air quantity is determined as a fraction of the
supply air quantity at the time and month of peak cooling load. This fixed air
quantity is then used for all other times and months of cooling load calculation and
for the heating load calculation.
The outside air conditions used in the load analysis are the outdoor wet and dry
bulb temperature unless an outside to exhaust air heat exchanger is nominated.
When a heat exchanger is nominated the modified outside air conditions are used
in the load analysis.
If Use AS 1668-2012 Multiple Compartment Formula on the AHU Tab Page is set
to YES the program does an initial run based on the entered outside air in each
room and then calculates the required percentage outside air for the AHU using
the following formula:
1
M  eqn 7-20a
1  R  rc
Where:
R = Qf / Q S
Qf = qf ie. the sum of the initially calculated outside (fresh) air quantities.
QS = qs ie. the sum of the initially calculated supply air quantities to each
room/zone (L/s)
qf = the initially calculated individual room/zone outside air quantity (L/s)
qs = the initially calculated individual room/zone supply air quantity (L/s)
rc = the highest ratio of outside (fresh) to supply air ( qf / qs )
The required outside air quantity to satisfy AS1668-2012 is then:
Q F = M . Qf
And the % outside air is then
P = QF / QS * 100
The calculations are then repeated with this AHU percentage outside air.
7-30 Outside to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger

The user has the option of nominating a outside to exhaust air heat exchanger.
The heat exchanger efficiencies nominated are assumed to be constant for the
varying ambient and exhaust air conditions.
The conditions of the air into the plant are computed using the following
equations:
ti = to - t(to - tr) eqn. 7-30a
where:
ti = temp. of inlet air to plant C
to = outdoor air temperature C
tr = return air temperature C
t = Temperature efficiency of heat exchanger
hi = ho - e(ho - hr) eqn. 7-30b
where:
hi = enthalpy of air to plant kW
ho = enthalpy of outdoor air kW
hr = enthalpy of return air kW
e = enthalpy efficiency of heat exchanger
The heat exchanger can be nominated for any of the processes except

evaporative cooling. When the heat exchanger is nominated the exhaust air is
assumed to be exhausted at the plant (ie. after the return air has absorbed all
return duct gains) whereas if not nominated, the exhaust air is assumed to be
exhausted from each room. As a consequence of being exhausted at the plant,
after absorbing the return air duct gains, some of the return duct gains do not
become a load on the plant. This reduction in load is shown in the load chart as
‘EXHAUSTED RETURN DUCT GAINS.’
7-40 Psychrometrics
CAMEL models seven different psychrometric processes
 Constant volume multi-zone with reheat
 Single zone constant volume heating and cooling
 Constant volume Face & Bypass
 VAV NO reheat
 VAV with reheat
 Reverse Cycle Heat Pump
 Evaporative cooling
The psychrometric process can be analysed using either:

 The bypass factor of the coil - the program calculates the supply air quantity
and leaving coil dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. This can be interpreted
as an apparatus efficiency. This method is described in DA9.
 A nominated leaving coil dry bulb – the program calculates the supply air
quantity and the coil leaving wet bulb temperature.
 A nominated leaving coil dry & wet bulb – the program calculates the supply
air quantity and the room relative humidity.
 A nominated supply air quantity – the program calculates the coil leaving dry
and wet bulb temperature.
With the first two options an Apparatus Dew Point can be specified if required.
The method CAMEL uses to model the different psychrometric processes (air
system types) is as follows:
Constant Volume Heating and Cooling Coil

1. Do initial load calculations at each hour and accumulate the adjusted room
sensible (ie room loads plus supply duct gains) and latent heat for the AHU ie
sum the zone loads which in turn are the sum of the room loads.
2. Make first estimate of outside air depending on the way the data is entered
ie. sum of room values, percentage of supply air, etc.
3. Calculate the AHU coil loads (including outside air) and do psychrometrics at
each hour including fixed bypass if nominated.
4. Determine time of peak AHU coil grand total heat and the time of the peak
grand total sensible heat. The latter is the time of peak air quantity.
At time of Peak AHU Grand Total Heat:

5. Determine the leaving coil conditions or if nominated the supply air quantity.
6. Calculate zone air quantities at AHU peak load on basis of zone peak load to
AHU peak load. Note, in the current version of CAMEL constant volume
heating and cooling systems are only allowed one zone.
7. Proportion supply air to rooms on basis of AREA or LOAD as specified by
user.
8. Check minimum supply air specified in any rooms and if violated proportion
supply air for AHU and all zones and rooms up to satisfy largest required
increase.
9. Apply AS 1668-2012 modification formula (refer clause 7-20) if requested or

if not, add up zone outside air quantities and calculate percentage for AHU
and hence the AHU outside air quantity.
10. If outside air quantity not equal to that in 2 above go to 3 and recalculate.
11. Once outside air converged, recalculate loads at each hour for Tables in
results.
12. Estimate the temperature and relative humidity for each room. This is
calculated as follows:
From the required leaving coil condition for the air handling unit (which is
based on the sum of room adjusted sensible and latent heats ie. the
AHU room sensible heat factor line) construct the room sensible heat
factor line for each room individually. These will (unless they are all
thermally identical) have different slopes. The resultant room dry bulb
temperature and relative humidity are the estimated hourly room
conditions.
Note that at other off design conditions the temperatures and humidities
for each room could vary further. It should be also noted that if the room
temperatures do increase (or decrease) the room load will, as a
consequence, decrease (or increase) slightly so that the estimate in
CAMEL is conservative estimate.
Constant Volume Multi-Zone with Face and Bypass Dampers

2. Make first estimate of outside air depending on the way the data is entered ie
sum of room values, percentage of supply air, etc.
3. Calculate the AHU coil loads (including outside air) and do psychrometrics at
each hour including fixed bypass if nominated.
4. Determine time of peak AHU coil grand total heat and the time of the peak
grand total sensible heat. The latter is the time of peak air quantity.
At time of Peak AHU Grand Total Heat:

5. Determine the leaving coil conditions or if nominated the supply air quantity.
6. Calculate zone air quantity as zone maximum adjusted Sensible Heat divided
by 1.2 times (Room temp – AHU coil leaving dry bulb).
user.
8. Check if minimum supply air specified in any rooms and if violated proportion
zone supply air up to satisfy largest increase.
9. Calculate for each zone, the room entering temperature for peak zone load,
and determine lowest leaving coil temperature.
10. Set AHU air quantity to sum of zone quantities.
if not, add up zone outside air quantities and calculate percentage for AHU
and hence the AHU outside air quantity.
12. If outside air quantity not equal to that in 2 above go to 3 and recalculate.
13. Once outside air converged, recalculate loads at each hour for Tables in
results.
calculated as detailed in item 12 of Constant Volume Heating and Cooling.

Constant Volume Multi-Zone with Reheat
2. Calculate sum of zone peak adjusted sensible loads.
3. At each hour determine the percentage of peak zone adjusted sensible load
for each zone and select the maximum percentage. Multiply the peak zone
load for each zone by this maximum percentage at this hour. This will be the
load including reheat for each zone assuming the leaving coil temperature is
reset to satisfy the most demanding space.
4. Make first estimate of outside air depending on the way the data is entered ie
sum of room values, percentage of supply air, etc.
5. Calculate AHU total loads (sum of zone load from 3 plus outside air load) and
do psychrometrics at each hour.
6. Determine when peak GTH occurs.
7. From the air off temperatures calculated in 5, determine air quantity
requirements for each zone to satisfy zone peak demand if air quantity not
fixed. If air quantity fixed proportion zone air quantities on basis of zone peak
loads.
user.
9. Cycle through zones and check if minimum supply air specified in any room
and if violated proportion zone air quantity to satisfy and adjust AHU air
quantity.
if not, add up zone outside airs and calculate percentage for AHU and hence
the AHU outside air quantity.
11. If outside air quantity not equal to that in 4 above, go to 5 and recalculate.
12. Once outside air converged, recalculate loads for Tables in results.
13. Calculate estimated minimum and maximum zone reheat coil capacities.
Minimum is reheat assuming leaving coil temperature is reset. Maximum is
reheat without coil reset.
The way in which the reheat is calculated for each zone is as follows:
(a) with no reset
Add the zone total room sensible heat divided by (1.2 times the zone
air quantity) to the leaving coil temperature to determine the average
room temperature for this zone without reheat (t1). The reheat is then
the zone supply air quantity multiplied by 1.2 times the difference
between the entered room design temperature and temperature t1.
(b) with reset
For each particular zone determine (using the calculated zone supply
air) which zone requires the lowest leaving coil temperature. Then
determine the reheat as above using this revised leaving coil
temperature.
Note that this “estimate” of reheat may not be the maximum required. Room
loads at other times could easily give higher values eg. If all the internal loads
in one particular room are off and all the people leave when other rooms are
at full cooling load, ie. in theory the reheat capacity required would be the
total internal heat load.

Variable Air Volume
2. Analyse as a Conventional constant volume with Heating and Cooling Coil to
obtain leaving coil temperature (or use fixed if user nominated).
3. Set AHU leaving air temperature as leaving coil or mixed temperature if a
bypass system.
At Each Time and Month
4. Determine variable air volume air quantity for each zone based on adjusted
room sensible heat plus reheat (if air quantity less than maximum turndown
and VAV with reheat being modelled).
5. Proportion supply air to rooms on basis of AREA or LOAD as specified by the
user.
6. Set AHU hourly air quantity equal to sum of zone air quantities and select
maximum as plant air quantity.
7. If first iteration go to 9.
8. If plant air quantity same as last iteration go to 11.
9. Recalculate AHU adjusted sensible heat (adding in reheat).
10. Recalculate air quantities and go to step 2.
11. Once plant air quantity converged calculate hourly loads for Tables (air
quantities already calculated in 6).
Minimum Air Quantity Calculation

The room air quantities in a zone are proportioned on the basis of floor AREA or
the peak room LOADS as selected by the user. If there are multiple rooms on a
zone, the air quantity to all rooms is increased until all specified minimums are
satisfied. An indication of the extent of the increase is reported in the results in the
Zones and Rooms Cooling Check Figures as an air quantity multiplier The largest
multiplier indicates which room has the largest increase and hence impact on the
zone air quantity.
If there are multiple zones on an AHU:
 In all systems except face and bypass and VAV with reheat, when the air
quantity is increased in a zone to satisfy a minimum requirement, the leaving
coil temperature will increase and this will necessitate a proportional increase
in air quantity to all other zones.
 In a VAV system with reheat, any increase in the zone air quantity to satisfy a
minimum requirement, results in increased reheat to that zone (without a
change in leaving coil temperature). Hence other zone air quantities are
unaffected.
 In a face and bypass system, increasing the air quantity for a specific zone (to
satisfy a minimum requirement) will result in an increase in the bypass air to
that zone but will not affect other zones
Note that if the load in a room only requires a small air quantity (and hence has a
low air change rate), specifying a minimum for this room either specifically or
using the global value (on the Project Screen) can increase room, zone and AHU
air quantities significantly. eg. A corridor requiring only 20 l/s (say 0.5 air change)
will increase air quantities by a factor of 12 if a minimum of 6 is specified.
Mixed or return by-pass process

The by-pass processes are normally used when the supply air quantity to the

rooms is required to be higher than the calculated dehumidified air quantity eg. to
maintain satisfactory air movement without raising the design leaving coil
temperature.
When a mixed or return by-pass process is nominated the supply air quantity
must therefore also be nominated on the AHU-Coil Tab Page. The by-pass air
quantity is then expressed as:
By-pass air quantity = Supply air quantity - Dehumidified air quantity
The resultant transfer of heat from the entering to the leaving side of the
apparatus is printed in the load chart as either MIXED or RETURN BY-PASS
ADJUSTMENT.
It is possible to model a dump back process i.e. a system where the dehumidified
air quantity exceeds the supply air quantity with the excess dehumidified air being
'dumped back' to the 'air on' side of the coil. This can be done by nominating a
mixed air bypass and supply air quantity with a bypass factor but not a nominated
ADP nor leaving conditions.
Evaporative cooling process

The program models evaporative cooling as a constant wet bulb process as an
approximation of the constant enthalpy process. The outside air quantity is set to
100%.
Since the grand total heat for an evaporative cooling process is zero (or
approximately zero), the criteria selected for when the load chart and
psychrometrics are printed is that of peak adjusted room sensible heat (unless
time and month are nominated). In the process the resultant room relative
humidity is computed while maintaining the specified room design dry bulb
temperature. The user is required to specify a room design relative humidity as a
first approximation.
Desiccant Humidity Control Unit

The way the desiccant humidity control unit is modelled in CAMEL is as follows:
1. The ambient design conditions for sizing the Humidity Control Unit is entered
by the user on the Project Tab. The default is the maximum summer design
wet bulb temperature for the location entered and 80% RH
2. The required specific humidity (g/kg) of the air leaving the Humidity Control
Unit (entering the main Air Handling Unit) to offset the room latent load is
determined by the program.
3. The program then estimates the moisture removal (g/kg) (as a function of the
ambient DB, WB and Specific Humidity and the Specific Humidity leaving the
HCU). This value is added to the required moisture (from step 1) to give the
moisture level of the air entering the desiccant wheel
4. The relative humidity of the air entering the desiccant wheel is assumed to be
at 95%. (point D)
5. The cooling capacity of the DX unit, that also heats the de-activation air to dry
the desiccant, is estimated at the entered HCU design conditions as a
function of the enthalpy of the air entering the desiccant wheel and the air
quantity being handled by the HCU. This DX coil capacity is assumed to be
constant under all other ambient conditions and required specific humidity.
6. The dry bulb temperature leaving the desiccant wheel is next calculated by first
determining the dry bulb temperature at the intersection of the enthalpy of
point D and the required specific humidity from step 2. To this is added the
temperature rise of the air due to the residual heat in the desiccant after it has
been re-activated and the supply fan heat to give the leaving conditions from
the HCU (point G). The temperature rise due to the residual re-activation heat
is estimated by the program as a function of the DX capacity (step 5 and the
air quantity).

7. From the DX coil capacity, the condition of the air entering the DX unit (point
C) is next determined again assuming 95% RH. These conditions are also the
air leaving the pre-cooling coil so that the capacity of the pre-cooling coil can
be calculated.
These calculations are then performed at each time and month based on the
summer design conditions for the selected location and the internal room latent
loads, to determine the peak load on the pre-cooling coil and the peak load on the
main AHU, or the main AHUs, if the HCU is a preconditioner serving a number of
AHUs.
For the hourly calculations at each month:
1. If the ambient condition is below point C, then the entering DX coil condition is
the enthalpy of point C and the ambient dry bulb temperature.
2. If the enthalpy of ambient air is less than that of point C then the desiccant DX
coil is assumed to cycle
Because the formulas used in the above calculations are empirical and based on
correlations with a particular manufacturers data, provision is made to re-run
CAMEL with the moisture removal rate (g/kg) of the desiccant wheel and/or the
cooling capacity (at the ambient HCU design conditions) of the DX unit serving the
desiccant wheel. These values are entered on the Project Tab and are used in
step 2 and 4 respectively instead of being calculated.
Fig 7-40A Desiccant Humidity Control Unit Process
7-50 Adjusted Room Sensible, Latent and Total Heat

The terminology of 'adjusted' room sensible heat, 'adjusted' room latent heat and
'adjusted' room total heat is introduced in this program.
The description 'effective' has traditionally been used to identify the heat quantities
associated with the Carrier method for psychrometric calculations. Using this
method the value for dehumidified air quantity is given by the equation:

Air Quantity = Effective Room Sensible Heat eqn 7-50a
1.2 (1 - Bypass factor) (Room temp - App. dewpoint)
where the effective room sensible heat is:

room supply duct portion of outside air
sensible + sensible + bypassed through
heat heat the apparatus
This equation is not strictly correct because the by-pass factor should be applied
to the GTH line. Manually this can only be done by a trial and error process on
the psychrometric chart. With the aid of a computer the exact equation is:
Air Quantity = (Adjusted Room Sensible Heat) eqn 7-50b

1.2 (Room temp - Leaving apparatus temp)
where:-
Adjusted Room Sensible Heat = Room Sensible Heat
+ Supply Duct Sensible Heat Gains
This formula can be employed, using the computer to iterate to the precise
answer. For a further description of the approximation in the Carrier method see
Reference 3.
The program uses the exact equation, ie. the equation 7-50b. The description
'adjusted' room sensible heat is used to identify the numerator of the equation.
Similarly 'adjusted' room latent heat is the sum of room latent heat and supply
duct latent heat gains. 'Adjusted' room total heat is the sum of adjusted room
sensible and latent heat.
7-60 Apparatus Load and Air Quantity Option

This option was in earlier versions of CAMEL but has not been implemented in
Version 5.00 – a future update. It will allow a re-run of the program, to gauge the
effect on room relative humidity of selecting a commercial air conditioning unit
which may be different in capacity to the design capacity calculated in the first run
of the program.
7-70 Light Weight Roofs

One deficiency in the CARRIER method is the lack of provision for modern
lightweight roof constructions in the evaluation of solar and transmission gains
through the roofs. In the CARRIER method, equivalent temperature differences
(ETD’s) are used to take account of the solar and transmission gain through
roofs. They are tabulated for a given latitude, number of hours of plant operation,
3 pm outdoor temperature, room temperature and daily range with corrections
available for other latitudes and conditions. The tabulated CARRIER data (Table
22 page 61 of DA9) only provides for roof surface densities (at the stated
2
conditions) down to 50 kg/m . For other conditions and latitudes the ETD’s for
roof in shade are used in evaluating the corrections and the tabulated values in
2
this case only go down to 100 kg/m . This is a severe limitation when using
lightweight roofs such as metal decking where the surface density can be 10
2
kg/m or less.
An investigation was undertaken by ACADS to find a means of extrapolating the
available data by comparison with other published data, ie. data published by
ASHRAE, and with computer generated data using the CSIRO computer program
TEMPER. (Refer. 4)
The resulting alternative ETD’s for roofs are listed in Appendix A . The values at
2 2
200 kg/m and above remain unchanged, while those at 100 and 50 kg/m have
2
been modified and those at 10 kg/m are new data.

The alternative ETD’s are used when “Light Weight Roof ETD’s” is checked on
the Wall Tab Page.
7-80 Modified Window Storage Load Factors (SFMOD) and

Wall ETD's
One of the limitations of the Carrier method is that the way in which the solar gain
through windows is predicted does not allow for shadows from reveals, overhangs
and other shading devices traversing the window throughout the course of the
day. For a window facing a given orientation, the solar gain at any given hour
when it is unshaded throughout the whole day is determined using equation 7-
80a.
SGj = A x PGi x SLFi,j x S.C. x Corr. eqn 7-80a
where -
SGj = solar gain at hour j
A = area of window
PGi = peak solar heat gain for the particular orientation i, latitude and
month (Table 5, page 25 in the Application Manual - DA9)
SLFi,j = the storage load factor for the particular orientation , storage
mass and hour j (Table 6 and 10 in the Application Manual -
DA9)
S.C. = glass shading coefficient
Corr. = Correction factors (Sash, haze, altitude and dew pt correction)
For a window that is in shade at all times the solar gain is determined from
equation 7-80b,
SGj = A x PGS x SLFS,j x S.C. x Corr. eqn 7-80b
Where the subscript S denotes the value for shade - normally the south exposure
value but in tropical locations when the sun is on the south facade, it is the north
exposure value.
Hour of Day
Row Description 6am 7 8 9 10 11 noon 1pm 2 3 4 5
1 SLF (North) 0.44 0.37 0.39 0.43 0.50 0.57 0.64 0.68 0.70 0.68 0.63 0.53
2 SLF (Shade) 0.81 0.84 0.86 0.89 0.91 0.93 0.93 0.94 0.94 0.95 0.95 0.95
3 SG full sun 220 185 195 215 250 285 320 340 350 340 315 265
4 SG full shade 17.8 18.5 18.9 19.6 20.0 20.5 20.5 20.7 20.7 20.9 20.9 20.9
5 % shaded Sun Off 100 100 100 100 100 50 0 0 100 Sun Off
6 SG (unshaded) 220 185 0 0 0 0 0 170 350 340 0 265
7 SG (shaded) - - 18.9 19.6 20.0 20.5 20.5 10.3 0 0 20.9 -
8 TOTAL 220 185 19 20 20 21 21 180 350 340 21 265
9 Row 8 - 4 - - 0 0 0 0 0 159 329 319 0 -
10 Row 3 - 4 - - 176 195 230 264 299 319 329 319 194 -
11 F = row 9/row 10 = 807/2325 = 0.347
12 Rate max -35 10 20 35 35 35 20 10 -10 -25 -50
13 Row 4 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
14 F (3-4) 70 58 61 68 80 92 104 111 114 111 102 85
15 SG (shade)* 52 55 63 75 88 100 115 150 185
16 SG (unshaded) 112 115 123 135 148 160 175 210 245
17 TOTAL** 88 77 80 88 100 113 125 140 175 210 185 106
* Maximum rate of decrease is half of -50 when load is less than 256
** The higher value of row 13 plus 14 and the total of row 15 x A SHADE and row 16 x ASUN is used when sun is on
the facade.
Table 7-80AIllustrating the Carrier and the ACADS modified method for calculating Solar Gain Through Windows.

The problem with using these two formulae is that eqn 6-70a applies to areas of
glass that are fully exposed to the sun (ie unshaded) whilst 7-80b applies to areas
of glass that are in full shade all the time. When a shadow traverses the window
these formulae do not apply and quite serious errors can occur if they are used -
the "hump in CAMEL" problem.
ACADS developed a practical method of interpolating these two formulae to
determine the solar gain through a window that has shadows traversing it during
the course of the day. The example illustrates the problem with the Carrier
method and how the ACADS method overcomes the problem.
2
Consider a north facing window of area 1 m situated in the Southern
Hemisphere. Table 7-80A details the calculations involved. Rows 1 and 2 are the
storage load factors for the north facing window in full sun (row 1) and the storage
load factors for the window in shade (row 2).
The peak solar gain for North and South facing windows on a building with a
2 2
storage mass of 500 kg/m and at 40 south latitude are 500 and 22 watts/m
respectively. Assuming for simplicity that the SH & A correction factors are 1.0,
the solar gain in full sun and in full shade from equations 7-80a and b are then as
listed in rows 3 and 4 of the table. These values are also plotted in Fig. 7-80A.
Fig 7-80A Solar Gain per Unit Area for North Facing Window for Building with
2
Storage Mass of 500kg/m at 40S Latitude, 12 Hour Plant Operation.
For the purpose of illustration the times the sun is on and off the north facade and
the percentage of the window area that is in shade is as listed in row 5. Firstly let
us look at the total solar gain when equations 7-80a and 7-80b are used,
multiplying the resultant values by the proportion in sun and in shade. These
calculations are listed in rows 6,7, and 8.
The total on row 8 clearly illustrates the "hump" in CAMEL with unrealistically high
values at 3 pm and at 5 pm when the sun goes off the facade. The values are
plotted in Fig. 7-80D.
Now let us compare this with the new method developed by ACADS.
STEP 1 . Determine the solar load (and equivalent storage load factor) when the
sun is off the facade.
This is determined by calculating a proportion between the load in sun and the

load in shade based on the ratio of the total solar energy that actually enters the
window during the time the sun is on the facade to the total solar energy that
would enter if the window were completely unshaded. To do this the following
steps as tabulated in Table 7-80A are taken.
(i) Subtract the solar gain for the window in full shade (row 4) from the actual
solar gain (row 8) during the hours the sun is on the facade. The resultant
values are listed in row 9.
(ii) The solar gain with the window in full shade (row 4) is then subtracted from
the solar gain for the window in full sun (row 3) to give row 10.
(iii) The proportioning factor F is then calculated as the ratio of the sum of row 9
divided by the sum of row 10.
Expressed mathematically this reduces to:
 (Asunj xQN xSLFN,j) -  (Ashadej x QS x SLFS,j)

j=1,n j=1,n
F= eqn 7-80c
Atot  (QN x SLFN,j - QS x SLFS,j)
j=1,n
where:
F = the proportioning fraction
Atot = the total window area
Ashadej = the area in shade at hour j
Asunj = the area in sun at hour j
SLFN,j = the storage load factor for North at hour j
SLFS,j = the storage load factor for South at hour j
QN,QS = the peak solar gain for North and South respectively
j = hour number from 1 to n, the hours of plant operation
The solar load at each hour that the sun is off the facade is then:
SGj = Atot(SLFS,j x QS + F(SLFN,j x QN - SLFS,j x QS)) eqn 7-80d
The calculations are tabulated in rows 13, 14 and 17 for the hours the sun is off
the facade. The equivalent storage load factor is then:
SLFEj = SGj / (Atot x QN) eqn 7-80e
STEP 2. Determine the load (and equivalent storage load factors each hour when
the sun is on the facade).
Fig 7-80B Method of determining Solar Load for Area of Window in Sun.

(a) For the area of window that is in sun, the solar gain at the current hour is
increased from the total solar gain at the previous hour by the maximum
hourly rate of change per hour for the orientation in full sun. When however
the total solar gain at the previous hour is greater than the solar gain at the
start of the hour at which the maximum increase occurs, then the rate of
increase is proportioned between the maximum rate and the rate in full sun
at the particular hour. This is illustrated in Fig 7-80B.
Note that, as shown in example 2, if the calculated load ends up higher than
the value for full sun, the full sun value is used, i.e. the full sun value is used
as an upper limit.
(b) For the area of window that is shaded first equation 7-80d is used to evaluate
a base level at each hour. The solar gain at the current hour is then the total
solar gain for the previous hour decreased by the maximum hourly rate of
change for the orientation in full sun with the base level as an overriding
minimum. If the total solar gain at the previous hour is less than the solar
gain at the end of the hour when the maximum decrease occurs, then the
rate at the hour after the maximum rate is used, instead of the maximum
rate.
Fig 7-80C Method of determining Solar Load for Area of window in Shade.
If the maximum rate is the last hour of plant operation then this second rate is
taken as half the maximum. The calculations for the solar gain for the area of
window that is shaded is illustrated in Fig 7-80C.
These solar gain calculations (in shade & unshaded) are detailed in rows 15, 16
and 17 of Table 7-80C. Once the solar gain values are evaluated the equivalent
storage load factors can again be determined at each hour using equation 7-80b.
The hourly loads for the example in Table 7-80A using the Carrier method (row 8)
and the modified ACADS method (row 17) are plotted in Fig 7-80D. The user can
have the program use this modified ACADS method by selecting “Modified
Storage Load Factors” check box on the Windows Screen. If this is not checked
equation 7-80a and 7-80b are used.
Note that the example (fig.7-80D) to illustrate the differences in the two methods
of calculation is extreme in as much as the changes from full sun to full shade
have been exaggerated. In practice with normal shading configurations the
differences in the two methods, although still significant would not normally be as
dramatic. The user of CAMEL must determine in his own mind whether this
modified method is more realistic. A point to consider in this evaluation is that the
modified method will reduce both refrigeration plant loads and coil loads; normally
more so the former. As a consequence of the peak coil load being lower

however, it is more likely that the peak dehumidified air quantity could occur at a
different time to the peak load and users should check carefully the relevant
psychrometrics to see if the coil will operate satisfactorily under both peak
conditions.
The same technique is used to calculate a modified Equivalent Temperature

Difference (ETD) for walls which are partially shaded during the course of the day.
Fig 7-80D Comparison of Carrier Method and ACADS modified Method for
Determining Effects of Shading on Windows.
7-90 Window, Wall & Roof Shading Calculations

With the extended capabilities provided in CAMEL for modelling a variety of
shading devices on walls and roofs, numerous shadows can fall on any one
surface. Because of the complexity associated with resolving overlapping
shadows where a large number of shading devices are involved, a method for
calculating shading using an elemental approach, has been developed to
determine the areas of external surfaces that are in sun and shade at each hour.
The method involves dividing the facade being considered into a large number of
small elements and then determining which of these elements are shaded by the
shading devices. A shading device is represented by a convex polygon with a
solar transmission factor (in the range zero to unity) such that the effective
shaded area of each element shaded by the device is (1-T)A where T is the
transmission factor and is analogous to a solar transmission coefficient. A is the
area of the element in shade and is assumed to be small enough to be fully in
shade or fully in sun. Generally shading devices are opaque and have a
transmission factor of zero. Complex shapes for shading devices can be
represented by a series of adjacent convex polygons. Where a number of
devices shade the same element, the effective area of the element which is
shaded is assumed to be:-
AS = (1-(T1 x T2 x ..... Tn)) x A eqn 7-90a
where:
Ti is the transmission factor for each device shading the element.
AS is the area of the element in shade.
A is the area of the element.

To determine which elements are in shade at a particular time, the vertices of the
polygon representing the shading device (the shading polygon) are projected
along the sun's ray onto the surface being shaded. The vertices on the surface
produce a shadow convex polygon. Each element of the shaded surface is then
tested to determine if it lies within the shadow polygon and if so the effective
shaded area is adjusted for the transmission factor of the current shading device.
This process is repeated for each of the shading polygons. The area of the wall
and windows in shade at a particular time is then determined by accumulating the
effective areas of elements in shade which lie within the boundaries of the wall
and window areas respectively.
The above is based on the assumption that if the mid point of an element is in
shade then the whole element can be considered to be in shade. This results in
an error in the evaluation of the shaded area, however if the number of elements
is very large then the error in the calculation of the shaded area is very small and
vice versa.
Consequently the accuracy of the calculation is inversely proportional to the
number of elements in the facade.
Conversely the computer processing time is directly proportional to the number of
elements in the facade.
To decrease the processing time required to perform the calculations, a number
of techniques have been employed. These are primarily directed at reducing the
number of elements that have to be considered for enclosure within a shadow
polygon. Other techniques are also employed because in CAMEL all shading
devices can be represented by shading polygons which are rectangles and
consequently, all shadow polygons are four sided figures with at least 1 pair of
sides parallel.
Two of the techniques used are:-
 where a shadow line (the side of a shadow polygon) lies within the boundaries
of an element, instead of simply considering the whole of the element to be
completely in sun or in shade, the portion of the element that is in sun or shade
is calculated.
 where a window boundary lies within the boundaries of an element then the
portion of the element that is on the window is calculated (rather than
assuming that the whole element is a window) and the respective areas are
used in determining the heat gain through the window and the wall.
Fig 7-90A Shading from

Hoods on Windows and
Walls.

Fig 7-90B Shading from a drop Panel.
Fig 7-90C Shading from Balconies.
Fig 7-90D Shading from Reveals

and Overhangs on a Complete
Facade.
These two techniques allow the selected element area to be significantly larger
than would otherwise be necessary for a given level of accuracy.
Once the areas in sun and shade have been determined then the heat load for
the window and/or wall is calculated using these areas and the appropriate
storage load factor and/or equivalent temperature difference.
An indication of the wide range of shading schemes that can be catered for by
CAMEL is shown in figures 7-90A to 7-90D and 4-50H.

7-100 Skylights
The methods of modelling skylights is not well defined in the original Carrier data -
as detailed in Application Manual DA9. While peak solar gains (table 5) are given
for horizontal surfaces, no storage load factors (tables 5-10) for horizontal glass
are given.
The storage load factors used for skylights in CAMEL are taken as the maximum
value of the storage load factors for vertical glass facing NE, N, NW - see Fig 7-
100A. This results in the factor remaining high during the period of the day when
the sun is high in the sky but not quiet as high as an E facing window in the early
morning or a high as a W facing window in the evening.
Fig 7-100A Typical Storage Load Factors for NE, N and NW and the resultant
SLF for Skylights.
The solar gain used in calculations for a skylight in shade, i.e. diffuse radiation
only, is taken as being twice the vertical window shade figure. This is because a
window is exposed to one half of the sky (source of diffuse radiation) while a
skylight (even one in shade) is exposed to virtually the whole sky.
The method of treating skylights allows shading of skylights by both shading
devices on the skylight itself or on the roof containing the skylight. Shading from
adjacent buildings is also considered.
Having established these basics a skylight is then treated in the same way as
vertical windows - even the shading calculations are done in the same way.
However, since the Storage Load Factors and shaded radiation used are
approximations, the results of the skylight load calculation must be considered to
be less accurate than vertical window loads and, as such, it is the users
responsibility to confirm the results especially if the skylight represents more than
a very small percentage of the total roof area above an air conditioned zone.
7-110 Azimuth Angles

The original Carrier data only catered for the eight cardinal points of the compass
for the determination of the heat gain through walls and windows i.e. at 45
intervals of azimuth. To evaluate heat gain for azimuth angles between these
cardinal points required interpolation. If the tabular data used in these
calculations is plotted it will readily be seen that linear interpolation is quite
inaccurate. The tabulated data dependant on exposure used in the calculations is
:-
(a) ETD's for walls
(b) Solar data for windows
(c) Storage load factors for windows.
Plots of all of these are reasonably sinusoidal in shape and a careful evaluation of
these plots for all conditions reveals that 22.5 intervals are sufficient for (a) and

(c) but for (b) 15 intervals are required to enable linear interpolation to be used
for any finer shift in exposure.
All of the existing tables in the Carrier manual of peak solar gain, and SLF's for
windows and ETD's for walls have therefore been plotted and a curve fitted so
Fig 7-110A Peak Solar Gain per Square Metre Through Reference Glass; 40S
Latitude.
that extra data at the smaller increments can be included in CAMEL (Refer Fig 7-
110A which is a typical plot for the peak solar gain through reference glass).
For storage load factors the existing Carrier 'SHADE' figures are applied to the
average south (or north if the north value is lower) solar gain over the period of
the day rather than the peak values which is the case for all the other exposures.
To obtain values for SSE and SSW, values for SE and SW could be used but
values for South (in sun) were not available so these had to be interpolated as
well. Because the shape of the curves in this region are relatively flat this did not
present any problem. The nett result was SLF's for 15 intervals from North and
including South (sun) and SHADE.
In the new tables of solar data (Appendix B) an extra column for the peak value
for south was also required to be used with the SLF's for South when determining
the solar gain when the South window is in sun.
7-120 Sun on the Normally Shaded Exposure

The Carrier data for peak solar gain through glass (Table 5 in the Application
Manual DA9) uses the average instantaneous solar gain values from Table 14 for
South and Shade. For the other exposures the peak values from Table 14 are
used.
For the Southern Hemisphere when the sun is on the South facade the south
values used need to be the peak values. The average value for the North
exposure is also often less than the average value for South and should therefore
be used as the figure for shade. To accommodate this an extra column in Table
5 has been established containing the smaller of the average value for South and
the average value for North. These are then the Shade values to be used with the
storage load factors for shaded glass (from Tables 6 to 10). The solar gain
values for north and south are then the peak values from Table 14. The new
interpolated storage load factors (refer clause 7-110) for the south exposure
(north exposure in the Northern hemisphere) are then used (in lieu of the South

(Shade) values in tables 6 to 10) with the peak solar gains each month to
determine the solar gain for glass in sun. The new peak solar gain values are
shown in Appendix B.
7-130 Operation in the Northern Hemisphere

CAMEL works equally well in the Northern or Southern Hemisphere and entry of
N or S in the appropriate field on the Project Tab Page determines the
hemisphere used in the calculations. CAMEL was originally developed for use in
the Southern Hemisphere and several additions were made in version 3.0 to allow
it to operate in the North.
For peak solar gains and storage load factors it is only a matter of mirroring the
exposures to cater for the Northern hemisphere. For the peak solar gain values
in the Northern hemisphere the peak solar gain for June and July must however
be divided by 1.07; January and December values of solar gain in the Southern
Hemisphere are approximately 7% higher than for the equivalent months in the
Northern Hemisphere due to the position of the earth relative to the sun. To avoid
a sudden step at the equator this increase is assumed to be linearly applied from
a zero correction at the equator to a + 7% increase at 10 South latitude.
One further complication occurs with the peak solar gain data when swapping
from the Northern Hemisphere to the Southern Hemisphere. The data at the
equator is generally symmetrical so that in April in the Southern hemisphere the
2
peak solar gain for a NE exposure is 440 w/m . When it is April in the Southern
Hemisphere it is October in the Northern Hemisphere and the value for October is
obtained from the southern hemisphere values by swapping the orientations i.e.
2
by reading the SW exposure value of 440 w/m . For the north and south
exposure however the data is not symmetrical. Hence for April in the Southern
2
Hemisphere the peak solar gain for a N exposure is 105 w/m . For October in the
Northern Hemisphere reading the value for south exposure yields a value of 80
2
w/m ,- approximately 20% lower. To avoid the anomaly of the load when a
building is entered at zero degrees south latitude being different from the same
building entered at zero degrees north latitude the values for north and south
exposures in the northern hemisphere are used for both hemispheres at the
equator. These values therefore differ slightly from the values for the north and
south exposure listed in Table 5 in DA9.
7-140 Plant Operating Times

The user can nominate the plant start and stop times for each AHU and it is only
for the hours between (and including) these hours for which the calculations are
performed on each design day.
However in the case of windows (and skylights) the data available in the Carrier
Method (DA9 Application Manual) is for 24 hour operation or 12 or 16 hour
operation, in which case the plant is assumed to start at 6 am. The difference
between the window loads for 12, 16, or 24 hour operation is that the 16 hour
operation figures include extra pull down load in the morning which tends to taper
off later in the day and the 12 hour operation includes a higher pull down load in
the morning and this affect may last all 12 hours.
The program determines which of these window factors will be used simply
depending on the operating hours selected.
If the operating hours are between 6 am and 5 pm (inclusive) the window figures
for 12 hour operation are used. If the plant is operating after 9 pm or before 6 am
then the 24 hour factors are used otherwise the 16 hour factors are used
(covering operation between 6 am and 9 pm inclusive).
Users should therefore be aware that whenever operating times do not line up
with the original 12, 16 (starting at 6 am) or 24 the pull down load due to the
windows may be reduced or even not allowed for at all. This will mean a larger
plant is required or the plant will need to start earlier to remove the pull down load.

7-150 Winter Warm Up Capacity
For buildings with intermittently operated warm air heating plants (e.g. office
o o
blocks) or with dual temperature operation (eg. 21 C during the day and 10 C at
night), additional heating capacity should be provided if unduly long heating up
periods are to be avoided. (from DA9 page 5).
Locations with lower winter design conditions require additional warm up capacity.
In general, buildings of heavier construction or with less daily hours of operation
(longer “off” periods) require more heating capacity and, for those with lighter
construction or more hours of operation less heating capacity is required.
In the case of direct heating (electric heaters in the air stream, direct gas fired
heater in the air stream, steam air heating coil or reverse cycle heating) the extra
heat up capacity is applied to the heating element. (See note on bottom of the
Heating Load Estimate Form, Fig 2 page 7 of DA9)
In the case of hot water heating coils, with heating provided by a boiler, this
additional capacity is added to the boiler but NOT to the heating coils (from DA9
page 5). This works because during the warm up period, when room
temperatures are low, there is a larger temperature difference between the water
and the air which will result in the extra heat being transferred. The extra capacity
of the boiler means that the boiler leaving temperature is at the design value even
though the return water temperature is lower than the design temperature ie. a
larger temperature difference across the boiler.
Boiler or Heating coil warm up allowance as show in the table below (from DA9) is
applied in CAMEL.
Difference between Inside & Outside

0
Winter Design Temperatures ( C) 10.0 12.5 15.0 17.5 20.0
Winter Warm up (%) 10 10 15 20 25
As discussed in AIRAH's DA9 on pages 5 and 6 under Heating Load Estimate this
Winter Warm Up Capacity will enable "average construction" buildings with the
plant operating approximately 11 hours per day to reach inside design
temperatures (during design outside conditions) within 2 - 2½ hours of boiler plant
start. In the case of direct heating (electric, gas, steam etc.) since there is no
heating of the water, the boiler and pipework, the inside design temperatures
should be reached sooner.
If the heating operates for other than 11 hours per day or the building storage
2
mass is other than 350 kg/m then the Winter Warm Up % is :-
Modified Winter Warm up (%) = Winter Warm up (%) x F(Storage) x F(Plant
hours)
where:
Extra Heat Up Capacity is entered on the Project Tab Page. The default is
as per the table above.
F(Storage) = 1 + log(Storage mass / 350) where the Storage mass is the
weighted average storage mass of all rooms on the AHU
2
Storage Mass kg/m 100 200 300 350 400 600 800 1000 1200
F (Storage) 0.46 0.76 0.93 1.0 1.06 1.23 1.36 1.46 1.54
(10-N)
F(Plant hours) = 1.05 for Plant hours (N) <= 10 and
1.2
1.0 - ((N-10)/14) for N >10
Plant Hours 6 8 10 11 12 14 16 18 20
F (Storage) 1.22 1.10 1.00 0.96 0.90 0.78 0.64 0.51 0.33
The plant operating hours for a boiler is taken as the earliest start time to the
latest finish time of all the AHU's connected to the boiler.

Appendix A
Revised Equivalent Temperature Differences for Roofs Exposed to Sun and in Shade.
The values tabulated below are used in preference to those in Table 22 page 61 of the Air Conditioning
Systems Design Manual. For further explanation refer to clause 7-70.
ALTERNATIVE EQUIVALENT TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCES (C)

FOR DARK COLOURED; SUNLIT AND SHADED ROOFS*
Based on 35C DB Outdoor Design Temp; Constant 25C DB Room Temp; 10C Daily Range; 24-hour
Operation; January and 40 South Latitude
Mass of roof SUN TIME

Cond- Per unit AM Noon PM
ition 2
Area kg/m
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5
10 -2.2 2.0 13.2 20.8 29.2 36.4 41.6 44.2 45.2 43.4 39.0 31.6
Expose
d 50 -1.8 0.6 7.2 14.7 22.2 29.0 36.0 40.0 41.8 41.6 39.0 34.0
to 100 -0.4 -0.2 2.4 7.8 13.0 17.1 25.2 30.6 34.2 36.0 36.0 34.0
Sun 200 4.4 3.9 3.3 3.9 5.6 7.8 11.1 15.0 17.8 20.6 23.3 24.4
300 7.2 6.7 5.6 6.1 6.7 8.3 11.1 14.4 17.2 19.4 21.7 23.3
400 9.4 8.9 8.3 8.3 8.9 9.4 11.1 14.4 16.7 17.8 20.0 21.7
10-50 -0.6 0.8 1.5 3.0 4.6 6.4 8.0 9.4 10.0 10.2 9.8 9.0
Shaded
100 -0.6 -0.6 0.0 1.1 2.2 3.3 5.6 7.2 8.9 9.4 10.0 9.4
200 -0.6 -0.6 0.0 0.6 1.1 2.2 3.3 5.0 6.7 7.8 8.9 9.4
300 0.6 0.6 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.7 2.2 3.3 4.4 5.6 6.7 7.2
Mass of roof SUN TIME

Cond- Per unit PM Mid- AM
ition 2
Area kg/m night
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5
10 22.8 13.6 8.1 8.6 3.8 1.9 0.3 -1.0 -1.9 -2.8 -3.7 -3.6
Expose
d to 50 27.2 19.4 13.0 5.6 6.0 4.0 2.2 0.8 -0.4 -1.2 -1.9 -2.3
Sun 100 30.2 25.2 19.4 14.2 10.6 8.0 6.0 4.4 3.0 1.6 0.7 -0.1
200 25.0 23.9 21.7 20.0 17.8 15.6 13.3 11.7 9.4 8.3 7.2 5.6
300 23.9 23.3 22.2 21.1 19.4 17.8 16.1 14.4 12.2 11.1 9.4 8.3
400 22.8 22.8 21.7 21.1 21.1 20.0 18.9 17.2 15.0 13.3 12.2 10.0
10-50 7.8 6.4 5.2 4.0 2.8 1.8 1.0 -0.2 -0.8 -1.2 -1.2 -0.8
Shaded
100 8.9 7.8 6.7 5.0 3.3 2.8 2.2 1.7 0.6 0.0 -0.6 -0.6
200 8.9 8.3 7.8 6.7 5.6 4.4 3.3 2.2 1.7 0.6 0.0 -0.6
300 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.2 6.7 5.6 4.4 3.3 2.8 2.2 1.7 1.1
Equation: Heat Gain through walls. W = (Area. m 2) x (Equivalent temperature difference) x

(Transmission coefficient U, Tables 30 and 32)
*With attic ventilated and ceiling insulated roofs, reduce equivalent temperature difference
25%. (This is not implemented in CAMEL).
For peaked roofs use the roof area projected on a horizontal plane.
For other conditions, refer to corrections listed immediately following Table 23

Appendix B
Peak Solar Heat Gain Through Reference Glass
(Revision of Table 5 from Application Manual DA9)
This Table of Peak Solar Gain Through Reference Glass is a revision of Table 5 from Application Manual DA9
modified as detailed in clause 7-120 to cater for 15 increments of azimuth angle and to include separate South peak
solar gain values and provide for the Northern Hemisphere as described in clauses 7-130.
2
Solar Gain in Watts per square metre (W/m )
Lat SOUTH N NE E SE S
N Azimuth  0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
or Month 360 345 330 315 300 285 270 255 240 225 210 195 180
N NW W SW S Hoz Sha
S 
Jan 45 50 75 160 270 385 480 525 525 480 400 305 210 790 160 July
Feb & Oct 45 70 150 250 350 440 510 535 510 440 325 210 105 770 80 Aug & Apr
Mar & Sep 45 150 255 370 450 507 530 525 460 370 245 120 45 790 32 Sep & Mar
105 220 335 440 510 535 510 440 350 250 125 60 45 770 32
0 Apr & Aug Oct & Feb
210 305 400 480 525 525 480 385 270 160 75 50 45 740 32
May & Jul 260 350 435 490 525 515 460 350 240 130 65 47 45 710 32 Nov & Jan
Jun 45 50 75 160 270 385 480 525 525 480 400 305 210 740 150 Dec
Nov 44 47 65 130 240 350 460 515 525 490 435 350 260 760 190 May
Dec June
Jan 47 60 115 220 350 450 530 545 535 500 390 260 130 830 95 July
Feb & Oct 45 75 185 300 390 465 510 520 495 410 300 165 50 790 40 Aug & Apr
Mar & Sep 90 190 310 400 490 525 520 490 425 320 190 75 45 780 32 Sep & Mar
230 315 400 470 520 525 490 420 330 210 90 55 45 730 31
330 400 460 510 525 510 450 350 240 115 70 50 45 660 29
May & Jul 380 425 470 510 525 500 430 310 190 90 60 48 45 640 29 Nov & Jan
Jun 45 55 100 210 335 435 500 525 520 470 365 250 120 780 95 Dec
Nov 47 50 80 190 320 420 520 535 540 520 425 315 170 820 135 May
Dec June
Jan 47 130 210 290 375 470 550 567 550 470 365 240 95 850 65 July
Feb & Oct 80 180 275 360 445 510 520 495 445 370 235 90 45 780 35 Aug & Apr
Mar & Sep 210 290 365 440 500 525 510 470 375 270 135 65 45 740 32 Sep & Mar
350 405 455 500 525 515 460 360 260 160 75 50 45 660 29
440 470 500 520 530 495 400 285 175 80 50 45 40 570 26
May & Jul 470 495 512 530 530 470 380 260 140 57 47 42 40 540 25 Nov & Jan
Jun 45 117 190 270 350 440 510 520 500 440 335 215 90 790 60 Dec
Nov 47 100 170 250 345 440 540 560 550 520 415 285 140 840 88 May
Dec June
Jan 100 175 260 340 405 502 550 555 530 440 315 200 75 830 55 July
Feb & Oct 200 270 340 410 475 520 520 485 430 340 240 105 45 740 35 Aug & Apr
Mar & Sep 330 380 427 480 515 522 500 445 365 280 190 100 45 670 30 Sep & Mar
460 490 507 510 505 482 430 335 225 120 65 50 45 560 26
500 520 522 510 485 450 370 270 135 50 43 38 38 460 20
May & Jul 510 525 523 510 475 425 330 215 85 38 38 38 38 410 21 Nov & Jan
Jun 95 165 240 320 395 472 520 525 500 410 295 185 50 780 49 Dec
Nov 70 140 220 300 375 455 540 560 550 470 350 230 110 840 68 May
Dec June
Jan 230 295 355 420 480 532 550 550 530 430 320 205 80 790 51 July
Feb & Oct 320 365 410 460 505 520 510 475 400 320 225 125 45 680 36 Aug & Apr
Mar & Sep 440 465 487 510 522 515 470 370 275 180 100 60 45 580 28 Sep & Mar
510 517 517 510 486 445 380 300 205 110 55 40 38 410 23
520 516 510 490 450 395 320 220 115 38 35 35 35 320 17
May & Jul 520 520 505 470 425 355 270 165 65 32 32 32 32 270 16 Nov & Jan
Jun 220 260 330 390 450 495 520 520 492 400 295 185 75 740 48 Dec
Nov 180 240 305 370 425 485 550 565 550 450 340 225 110 800 58 May
Dec June
Jan 360 400 445 480 520 545 550 535 490 390 285 175 70 710 48 July
Feb & Oct 440 465 482 500 512 512 500 445 380 300 210 120 45 580 35 Aug & Apr
Mar & Sep 500 507 510 510 505 490 440 352 260 180 90 47 38 470 26 Sep & Mar
530 525 515 500 460 405 330 245 160 90 52 38 35 300 17
480 470 445 400 340 265 200 125 60 28 28 28 28 170 11
May & Jul 440 430 410 370 290 215 150 80 40 22 22 22 22 125 8 Nov & Jan
Jun 330 375 415 450 490 510 510 487 440 370 265 150 65 670 45 Dec
Nov 310 365 415 460 505 535 550 550 525 430 320 210 100 740 53 May
Dec June
S SE E NE N Hoz Sha 
0 345 330 315 300 285 270 265 250 235 210 195 180 Month
0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
 Azimuth
S SW W NW N
NORTH
Notes 1. Hoz = Heat Gain on Horizontal Glass.
2. Sha = Heat Gain on Totally Shaded Glass; For horizontal glass twice this figure is taken.
3. For Northern hemisphere June and July values from the table need to be divided by 1.07.

Appendix C
Extract from MASTER.WEA file
Illustrated below is an extract from the file MASTER.WEA which contains the
monthly design conditions and other data for the the Australian and Pacific Island
locations. The first four lines of the data file describe the data in each entry.
The four lines for each entry consist of:-
Line 1 Location number and Location
Line 2 Daily Range, Latitude, North or South, Longitude, Summer 3 pm Dry
Bulb and Wet Bulb Design Temperatures, Winter 8 am Dry Bulb
Temperature and Relative Humidity.
Line 3 Monthly 3 pm Dry Bulb Design Condition (January to December).
Line 4 Monthly 3 pm Wet Bulb Design Condition (January to December).
The last value on lines 2 to 4 is the algebraic sum of all the values on the line and
is used to check that no values have been inadvertently modified. The first 8
columns on each line are not read by the program and may be used to describe
the line. The data on each line is in fixed format.
The user may add other data to the file provided it is of the same form and
entered in exactly the same format, complete with the check sums as the last
item on the line.
19-05-15 0000 DESCRIPTION (Last value on line is arithmetic sum of all values)
#1 Daily range, Lat, N or S, Long, Summer 3PM DB&WB, Winter 8AM DB&RH, Ref Long,
#2 12 Monthly 3PM DB values(JAN to DEC) | Temps. exceeded on average no
#3 12 Monthly 3PM WB values(JAN to DEC) | more than once every 2 years.
1006 WYNDHAM AERO WA 1990-2012(3)
9.4 15.5 S 128.1 41.4 27.7 18.2 80.0 120.0 11 451.3
3PM DB 41.9 41.0 40.4 39.1 37.3 35.0 35.7 36.9 39.8 41.7 42.5 42.4 473.7
WB 28.3 28.2 27.6 27.2 24.9 23.6 23.5 23.6 24.8 27.2 27.3 27.9 314.1
1007 TROUGHTON ISLAND WA 1993-2013(4)
5.4 13.8 S 126.1 33.5 28.8 20.7 80.0 120.0 6 434.3
3PM DB 33.4 33.5 33.7 33.7 32.6 30.0 29.2 29.8 31.2 32.7 33.9 33.9 387.6
WB 29.4 28.9 28.9 28.5 26.8 25.5 24.9 25.8 27.2 28.0 28.9 29.7 332.5
1013 WYNDHAM WA 1990-2013(4)
10.3 15.5 S 128.1 41.5 28.9 16.5 80.0 120.0 11 451.8
3PM DB 41.9 40.9 40.3 39.0 37.0 34.9 35.6 36.9 39.7 41.6 42.5 42.6 472.9
WB 29.7 29.0 28.6 28.0 26.9 24.9 25.2 25.1 27.1 28.0 28.8 29.5 330.8
1018 MT ELIZABETH WA 1994-2013(4)
10.8 16.4 S 126.1 37.7 25.8 17.8 80.0 120.0 546 980.6
3PM DB 37.2 36.7 35.7 35.0 33.1 31.5 31.8 34.3 36.8 38.9 39.1 39.0 429.1
WB 26.7 27.7 25.9 24.8 23.0 21.9 21.3 20.9 21.9 23.9 24.9 26.4 289.3
1025 DOONGAN WA 1990-2013(4)
10.3 15.4 S 126.3 38.4 27.5 14.1 80.0 120.0 385 817.0
3PM DB 37.7 36.8 36.4 35.9 34.6 32.3 32.9 35.2 37.9 39.7 39.9 39.3 438.6
WB 29.6 28.1 27.0 25.8 24.8 24.7 23.5 22.6 25.1 25.8 27.1 30.1 314.2
2012 HALLS CREEK AERO WA 1990-2012(3)
11.3 18.2 S 127.7 40.7 24.7 13.3 80.0 120.0 422 857.9
3PM DB 41.2 40.7 39.1 37.7 34.5 32.2 32.4 34.9 38.3 40.6 41.5 41.8 454.9
WB 25.3 25.5 24.8 23.3 21.4 19.8 19.5 19.5 20.7 22.2 23.7 24.9 270.6
2032 WARMUN WA 1990-2013(4)
12.2 17.0 S 128.2 42.0 27.8 14.5 80.0 120.0 203 644.7
3PM DB 42.5 41.7 40.6 38.7 36.6 34.5 34.7 36.9 39.9 42.2 43.0 43.3 474.6
WB 28.0 28.8 27.1 27.2 27.6 24.8 22.8 26.7 25.4 26.0 28.6 27.3 320.3
2056 KUNUNURRA AERO WA 1990-2012(3)
10.1 15.8 S 128.7 40.9 26.8 17.5 80.0 120.0 44 483.8
3PM DB 40.9 39.9 39.5 38.6 36.4 34.6 34.8 36.7 39.2 41.0 42.0 42.0 465.6
WB 27.7 27.7 26.8 25.9 24.5 21.6 21.4 21.8 23.5 25.9 25.9 27.0 299.7
2064 ARGYLE AERO WA 1995-2013(3)
10.3 16.6 S 128.4 41.0 28.6 16.2 80.0 120.0 165 606.1
3PM DB 41.1 40.7 39.1 38.0 36.0 34.3 34.6 36.6 39.6 41.4 42.0 42.3 465.7
WB 28.9 26.9 30.2 30.6 28.7 22.4 21.4 21.5 27.6 27.4 25.9 29.7 321.2
3003 BROOME AERO WA 1990-2012(3)
6.0 18.0 S 122.2 37.3 27.9 14.8 80.0 120.0 7 433.2
3PM DB 35.7 36.4 38.3 38.0 36.5 33.4 32.8 34.9 37.3 38.1 38.6 37.0 437.0
WB 28.6 28.7 28.7 27.4 25.0 23.7 22.6 22.8 24.4 26.6 27.4 28.2 314.1
... etc.

Appendix D
List of Standard Walls and Roofs
The thermal resistance, conductivities and the densities used in compiling the
standard list are listed in Table E.
2 2
WALLS m K/W ROOFS m K/W
Air Gaps, vertical (still air) - Roof Spaces naturally ventilated

No reflective Foil 0.16 NO reflective foil 0.46
With reflective foil 0.61 with reflective foil 1.36
Film Coefficient - Air Gaps, horizontal still air
Inside (still air) 0.12 No reflective foil 0.16
Outside (3.0 m/s) 0.04 With reflective foil 0.57
Film Coefficient –
Kg/m3 W/m.K Inside (heat flow down) 0.16
Colourbond 7680 45.00 Outside (3.0 m/s) 0.04
Brick 1950 0.78
L.W. Concrete 1900 0.69 Kg/m3 W/m.K
H.W. Concrete 2400 1.44
Concrete Block walls:- Acoustic tile ceiling 480 0.06
90mm Hollow L.W. 1360 0.54 Bituminous membrane 1120 0.16
190mm Hollow L.W. 910 0.83 Compressed Straw Board. 320 0.081
90mm Hollow H.W. 1650 0.76 Insulation Blanket R1.5 (60mm)* 16 0.042
190mm Hollow H.W 1100 1.04 Insulation Blanket R2.0 (80mm)* 16 0.042
Insulation Blanket R2.5 (100mm)* 16 0.042
90mm Solid L.W. 2020 0.95 Insulation Blanket R3.0 (120mm)* 16 0.042
90mm Solid H.W. 2400 1.40 Plasterboard 880 0.17
Fib. Cement Sheet 1490 0.32 Steel Roofing 7850 47.9
Insulation Batts R1.5 (75mm) 10 0.052 Tiles, clay 1920 0.84
Metal Siding 7850 47.90
Plaster (pearlite) 615 0.12
* allows 5% reduction for compression and other
Plasterboard (15mm) 880 0.17
losses
Render, external 1570 0.53
Weatherboard, pine 506 0.10
Polystyrene 16 0.039
Table E Thermal Resistance, Conductivities and Densities Used in Compiling the Standard List.
Listed below are the standard wall and roof numbers which can be referenced in the External
2 2
Tab Page together with the U value (W/m K), the surface density (kg/m ) and the description
of each wall or roof. They correspond with the walls and roofs in the MASTER.RFF file for the
energy analysis program BEAVER.
WALLS
Clay Brick
Solid Double Brick
W1 2.262 429 110 brick, 110 brick
W2 1.764 438 110 brick, 110 brick, 15mm plaster
Brick Veneer
W3 1.924 223 110 brick, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W4 0.633 223 110 brick, Ref airgap, Foil, Ref airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W5 0.510 224 110 brick, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W6 0.331 224 110 brick, Ref airgap, Foil, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
Cavity Double Brick
W7 1.661 429 110 brick, Airgap, 110 brick
W8 1.375 438 110 brick, Airgap, 110 brick, 15mm plaster
W9 1.593 337 110 brick, Airgap, 90 LW concrete
W10 1.139 346 110 brick, Airgap, 90 LW concrete , 15mm plaster
W11 1.726 363 110 brick, Airgap, 90 HW concrete
W12 1.420 372 110 brick, Airgap, 90 HW concrete , 15mm plaster
Heavyweight Solid Concrete Block
Solid Double
W13 3.465 432 90 HW solid concrete , 90 HW solid concrete
W14 2.418 441 90 HW solid concrete , 90 HW solid concrete , 15mm plaster
Block Veneer
W15 2.257 225 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard

W16 0.665 225 90 HW solid concrete block, Ref airgap, Foil, Ref airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W17 0.530 226 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W18 0.340 226 90 HW solid conc blk, Ref airgap, Foil, Ref airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
Cavity Double Block
W19 2.229 432 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW solid concrete block
W20 1.743 441 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW solid concrete block, 15mm plaster
W21 1.815 338 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
W22 1.479 348 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
W23 1.989 365 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block
W24 1.593 374 90 HW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
Lightweight Solid Concrete Block
Solid Double Block
W25 2.861 364 90 LW solid concrete block, 90 LW solid concrete block
W26 2.108 373 90 LW solid concrete block, 90 LW solid concrete block, 15mm plaster
Block Veneer
W27 2.112 191 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W28 0.652 191 90 LW solid concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W29 0.522 191 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W30 0.336 191 90 LW solid conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap,R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
Cavity Double Block
W31 1.963 364 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW solid concrete block
W32 1.576 373 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW solid concrete block, 15mm plaster
W33 1.720 304 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
W34 1.416 313 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
W35 1.876 330 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block
W36 1.519 340 90 LW solid concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
Lightweight Hollow Concrete Block
Single Concrete Block
W37 2.517 173 190 LW hollow concrete block
W38 2.293 212 Concrete render, 190 LW hollow concrete block
W39 1.833 131 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W40 1.645 182 190 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W41 0.623 131 90 LW hollow concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W42 0.600 182 190 LW hollow concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W43 0.503 132 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W44 0.488 182 190 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W45 0.328 132 90 LW hollow conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
W46 0.322 182 190 LW hollow conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
W47 1.687 170 Concrete render, 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W48 1.527 221 Concrete render, 190 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W49 0.605 171 Conc render, 90 LW hollow conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm p'board
W50 0.583 221 Conc render, 190 LW hollow conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm p'board
W51 0.491 171 Conc render, 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W52 0.477 222 Concrete render, 190 LW hollow conc blk, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W53 0.323 172 Conc render, 90 LWHCB, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
W54 0.317 222 Conc render, 190 LWHCB, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
Cavity Double Block
W55 1.531 245 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
W56 1.285 254 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
W57 1.428 284 Conc render, 90 LW hollow conc blk, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
W58 1.211 293 Concrete render, 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 LWHCB, 15mm plaster
Heavyweight Hollow Concrete Block
Single Concrete Block
W59 2.918 209 190 HW hollow concrete block
W60 2.565 248 Concrete render, 190 HW hollow concrete block
Block Veneer
W61 2.011 157 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W62 1.781 218 190 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W63 0.642 157 90 HW hollow concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W64 0.617 218 190 HW hollow concrete block, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W65 0.532 149 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W66 0.499 219 190 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W67 0.333 158 90 HW hollow conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
W68 0.326 219 190 HW hollow conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
W69 1.837 197 Concrete render, 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W70 1.643 257 Concrete render, 190 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W71 0.623 197 Conc render, 90 HW hollow conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm p'board
W72 0.599 257 Conc render, 190 HW hollow conc blk, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm p'board
W73 0.503 197 Conc render, 90 HW hollow conc blk, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W74 0.488 258 Conc render, 190 HW hollow conc blk, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard

W75 0.328 197 Conc render, 90 HWHCB, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
W76 0.321 258 Conc render, 190 HWHCB, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm p'board
Cavity Double Block
W77 1.796 297 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block
W78 1.476 306 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block. 15mm plaster
W79 1.656 336 Conc render, 90 HW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 HW hollow concrete block,
W80 1.372 345 Conc render, 90 HW hollow conc blk, Airgap, 90 HW hollow conc blk, 15mm plaster
W81 1.653 271 Conc render, 90 HW hollow conc blk, Airgap, 90 LW hollow conc blk, 15mm plaster
W82 1.370 280 Conc render, 90 HW hollow conc blk, Airgap, 90 LW hollow conc blk, 15mm plaster
W83 1.533 310 Conc render, 90 LW hollow concrete block, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
W84 1.287 319 Conc render, 90 LW hollow conc blk, Airgap, 90 LW hollow conc blk, 15mm plaster
Solid Concrete Walls
W85 4.358 240 100mm Heavy Weight concrete
W88 2.821 249 100mm Heavy Weight concrete, 15mm plaster
W91 2.231 249 100mm Heavy Weight concrete, Airgap, 15mm plaster
W94 0.578 250 100mm Heavy Weight concrete, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
Infill Panels
W97 4.302 95 50mm Light Weight concrete
W98 2.797 104 50mm Light Weight concrete, 15mm plaster
W99 2.216 104 50mm Light Weight concrete, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W100 0.577 105 50mm Light Weight concrete, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
Metal Siding
W101 6.249 13 Metal siding
W102 1.299 13 Metal siding, Ref Airgap, Foil
W103 2.640 21 Metal siding, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W104 0.695 21 Metal siding, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W105 0.549 22 Metal siding, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W106 0.624 26 Metal siding, R1.5 batts, Metal siding
W107 1.206 21 Metal siding, Ref Airgap, Foil, 10mm plasterboard
W108 2.055 135 Metal siding, Airgap, 90 LW hollow conc blk
W109 0.647 135 Metal siding, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block
W110 1.635 144 Metal siding, Airgap, 90 LW hollow concrete block, 15mm plaster
W111 0.598 144 Metal siding, Ref A'gap, Foil, Ref A'gap, 90 LW hollow conc blk, 15mm plaster
W112 2.568 253 Metal siding, Airgap, 100mm HW concrete
W115 1.944 262 Metal siding, Airgap, 100mm HW concrete, 15mm plaster
Weatherboards
W118 2.005 15 13mm Weatherboards, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W119 0.642 15 13mm Weatherboards, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W120 0.515 16 13mm Weatherboards, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W121 0.333 16 13mm Weatherboards, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
Fibrous Cement Sheet
W122 2.515 18 6mm Fibro cement sheet, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W123 0.618 18 6mm Fibro cement sheet, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W124 0.544 18 6mm Fibro cement sheet, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W125 0.345 18 6mm F'cement sheet, Ref Airgap, Foil, Ref Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
Sandwich Panel
W126 0.693 10 50 mm Polystyrene between .6 mm colorbond

ROOFS
Membrane
Note: Roof membrane is a waterproofing layer such as bitumen, asphalt etc.
R1 0.997 377 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R2 1.159 383 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R32 0.411 378 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R34 0.436 384 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R5 3.061 371 10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW concrete
Metal Deck over Concrete

R6 2.357 373 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW concrete
R7 0.908 379 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW concrete, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R8 1.041 384 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW concrete, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R36 0.395 380 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R38 0.419 385 Metal deck, Airgap, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
Metal Deck
R11 1.195 19 Metal deck, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R12 1.436 24 Metal deck, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R40 0.441 20 Metal deck, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R42 0.471 25 Metal deck, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R15 0.527 19 Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R16 0.569 24 Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R44 0.301 20 Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R46 0.314 25 Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R19 0.435 29 Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 50mm compressed straw
R48 0.268 30 Metal deck, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R1.5 batts, 50mm compressed straw
R21 6.249 13 Metal deck
R22 1.370 13 Metal deck, Ref Airgap, Foil
R50 0.463 14 Metal deck, Ref Airgap, Foil, R1.5 batts
Clay Tiles
R24 1.164 43 19mm clay tile, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R25 1.391 48 19mm clay tile, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R52 0.437 44 19mm clay tile, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R54 0.466 49 19mm clay tile, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard

R28 0.521 43 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R29 0.562 48 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R56 0.299 44 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R58 0.312 49 19mm tile, Airgap, Foil, Ref roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard

Appendix E
Extract from CAMEL.WAR file
This is the CAMEL file containing the U values and surface densities for the walls
and roofs that can be entered as Wnn or Rnn in the External Tab Page. They
correspond with the walls and roofs in the MASTER.RFF file for the energy analysis
program BEAVER. Users can add their own walls and roofs if they require and these
can also be added to the MASTER.RFF file if compatibility is to be maintained.
The first line for each wall/roof type contains the code in the first four columns
followed by the U value and the surface density in a fixed format. The second line is
a description (up to 80 characters) that is displayed in the results for CAMEL when
the particular wall or roof is used. The lines which begin with '{}' or '}{' are sub-
heading lines which are displayed in the CAMEL selection list.
{}Clay brick walls
W1 2.130 422 A
110 brick, 110 brick
W2 1.682 432 A
110 brick, 110 brick, 15mm plaster
W3 1.867 220 B
110 brick, Airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W4 0.627 220 D
110 brick, Ref airgap, Foil, Ref airgap, 10mm plasterboard
W5 0.506 230 C
110 brick, Airgap, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W6 0.329 230 E
110 brick, Ref airgap, Foil, R1.5 batts, 10mm plasterboard
W7 1.588 422 B
110 brick, Airgap, 110 brick
W8 1.325 432 B
110 brick, Airgap, 110 brick, 15mm plaster
W9 1.319 337 B
110 brick, Airgap, 90 LW concrete block
W10 1.132 346 B
110 brick, Airgap, 90 LW concrete block, 15mm plaster
...
...
...
}{Water proofed concrete roofs
R1 .997 377 A
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, 13mm acoustic tiles
R2 1.158 377 A
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, 13mm plasterboard
R32 .411 378 B
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm acoustic tiles
R33 .359 379 C
R3 .296 379 D
R34 .436 381 B
10mm roof membrane, 150mm HW conc, Roof space, R1.5 batts, 13mm plasterboard
R35 .378 382 C
R4 .308 382 D
...
etc.
DA5 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 151

Appendix F
CAMEL & BEAVER Master Glass Data
The following glass types (listed by manufacturer) are contained within the program and may be selected on the
window screen for any particular window by reference to the number in the first column. They represent some of
the most commonly used glass types but this in no way can be taken as endorsement of a particular glass or
manufacturer and indeed the user should advise ACADS-BSG if it is thought that the list should be expanded or
modified. While the list is believed correct at the time of preparation it is the users responsibility to ensure that
any data he uses for a particular glass is indeed correct by checking with the manufacturer. This data was
calculated using WINDOW 5.2 and the standard NFRC 100–2001 conditions and the International Glass
2.
Database Number is also shown. This means the NFRC U-value stated (w/m °C) is calculated at –17.8 °C and
a wind speed of 5.5 m/s while the NFRC SC (shading Coefficient) and SHGC are at an outside temperature of
32 °C and a wind speed of 2.8 m/s and an inside air velocity of 0 m/s. They are not based on the same
parameters as the data in DA9 and as used in CAMEL.
Those with –NLA in the Type are No Longer Available

Generic
No. NFRC Camel NFRC Camel NFRC Thick Type IGDB No.
U-val U-val SC SC SHGC (mm)
98 5.82 5.49 0.94 0.94 0.82 6 Clear 103
99 2.70 2.95 0.81 0.81 0.70 6 Clear / 12mm Air / Clear 103/103
G.James - Single
100 4.91 5.48 0.36 0.38 0.30 6 Solarplus TS21 on Clear (S2) 5774
101 4.91 5.48 0.35 0.37 0.29 6 Solarplus TS21 on Green (S2) 5775
102 4.91 5.48 0.34 0.36 0.29 6 Solarplus TS21 on Grey (S2) 5776
103 4.91 5.48 0.34 0.37 0.29 6 Solarplus TS21 on Panasap Blue (S2) 5778
113 5.18 5.48 0.43 0.44 0.36 6 Solarplus SC22 on Clear (S2) 5830
116 4.97 5.48 0.38 0.40 0.32 6 Solarplus SS22 on Clear (S2) 5790
117 4.97 5.48 0.36 0.38 0.30 6 Solarplus SS22 on Green (S2) 5791
118 4.97 5.48 0.35 0.37 0.30 6 Solarplus SS22 on Grey (S2) 5792
119 4.97 5.48 0.35 0.37 0.30 6 Solarplus SS22 on Panasap Blue (S2) 5794
120 3.55 5.26 0.73 0.78 0.63 10.76 Optilight HL119 Laminate 5550
128 3.55 5.26 0.46 0.54 0.39 10.76 Optiltight HL339 Laminate 5565
130 3.56 5.27 0.46 0.54 0.39 10.76 Optilight HL5a19 Laminate 5575
131 3.55 5.27 0.50 0.57 0.42 10.76 Optilight HL5p19 Laminate 5581
135 3.58 0.46 0.39 8.76 Optilight Excel Elephant Hide Laminate –NLA 5500
136 3.58 0.47 0.40 8.76 Optilight Excel Oasis Spring Laminate –NLA 5532
137 3.55 0.37 0.31 10.76 Optilight Excel Turkish Bath Laminate –NLA 5540
138 3.55 0.39 0.33 10.76 Optilight Excel Island Sea Laminate –NLA 5526
139 3.53 0.35 0.29 12.76 Optilight Excel Midnight Laminate –NLA 5503
140 3.55 5.26 0.35 0.42 0.29 10.76 Solarplus SL20 Low E Laminate 5901
152 DA5 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

G.James - Double Glazing

200 2.70 2.95 0.81 0.81 0.70 6 Clear / 12 Air / 6mm Clear IGU 9804/9804
201 2.70 2.95 0.57 0.57 0.49 6 Green / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 914/9804
202 2.70 2.94 0.52 0.52 0.45 6 Grey / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9834/9804
203 2.70 2.95 0.45 0.46 0.39 6 Azuria / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5036/9804
204 2.70 2.94 0.46 0.45 0.40 6 Evergreen / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9884/9804
205 1.88 1.93 0.77 0.77 0.67 6 Clear / 12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU 9804/9924
206 1.88 1.93 0.52 0.52 0.45 6 Green / 12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU 914/9924
207 1.88 1.93 0.46 0.46 0.40 6 Grey / 12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU 9834/9924
208 1.88 1.93 0.39 0.40 0.34 6 Azuria / 12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU 5036/9924
209 1.88 1.93 0.40 0.40 0.35 6 Evergreen / 12 Air / 6 Low E (EA) (S3) IGU 9884/9924
210 2.41 2.61 0.25 0.26 0.22 6 Solarplus TS21 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5774/9804
214 2.43 2.64 0.27 0.28 0.23 6 Solarplus SS22 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5790/9804
215 1.79 1.80 0.60 0.60 0.52 6 LE80i on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5650/9804
216 1.79 1.80 0.43 0.44 0.38 6 LE80i on Green (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5651/9804
217 1.79 1.80 0.36 0.37 0.32 6 LE80i on Grey (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5652/9804
218 1.79 1.80 0.43 0.43 0.37 6 LE80i on Bronze (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5653/9804
219 1.79 1.80 0.39 0.39 0.34 6 LE80i on Panasap Blue (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5654/9804
220 1.79 1.80 0.35 0.35 0.30 6 LE80i on Arctic Blue (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5655/9804
221 1.79 1.80 0.35 0.35 0.30 6 LE80i on Azuria (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5656/9804
222 1.79 1.80 0.35 0.36 0.31 6 LE80i on Evergreen (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5657/9804
247 1.68 1.64 0.40 0.40 0.35 6 DLE70 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5600/9804
248 1.68 1.64 0.34 0.34 0.30 6 DLE70 on Green (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5601/9804
249 1.68 1.64 0.27 0.27 0.23 6 DLE70 on Grey (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5602/9804
250 1.68 1.64 0.29 0.29 0.25 6 DLE70 on Bronze (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5603/9804
251 1.68 1.64 0.29 0.30 0.25 6 DLE70 on Panasap Blue (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5604/9804
252 1.68 1.64 0.27 0.27 0.23 6 DLE70 on Arctic Blue (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5605/9804
253 1.68 1.64 0.30 0.30 0.26 6 DLE70 on Azuria (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5606/9804
254 1.68 1.64 0.30 0.30 0.26 6 DLE70 on Evergreen (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5607/9804

Viridian – Single
151 5.81 5.48 0.95 0.95 0.82 6 Vfloat Clear 9708
152 5.74 5.42 0.89 0.89 0.78 8 Vfloat Clear 9709
153 5.68 5.36 0.86 0.86 0.75 10 Vfloat Clear 9710
154 5.81 5.48 0.67 0.66 0.58 6 Vfloat Grey 9714
155 5.68 5.36 0.57 0.56 0.50 10 Vfloat Grey 1227
156 5.81 5.48 0.71 0.70 0.62 6 Vfloat Green 9718
157 5.68 5.36 0.57 0.56 0.50 10 Vfloat Green 4271
158 5.81 5.48 0.75 0.74 0.65 6 Vfloat Bronze 4269
159 5.68 5.36 0.63 0.62 0.55 10 Vfloat Bronze 4284
160 3.61 5.41 0.79 0.83 0.69 6.38 ComfortPlus Clear82 9726
161 5.81 4.48 1.04 1.04 0.90 6 VFloat SuperClear 9814
162 5.70 5.38 1.03 1.03 0.90 10 VFloat SuperClear 9816
163 5.81 5.48 0.61 0.60 0.53 6 SuperGreen 9725
164 5.82 5.48 0.41 0.39 0.36 6 SuperGrey 9894
165 5.81 5.48 0.60 0.59 0.52 6 SuperBlue 9864
166 5.69 5.37 0.52 0.50 0.45 10 SuperBlue 9866
167 3.83 5.48 0.48 0.55 0.42 6 Evantage Grey 6mm 9911
168 3.83 5.48 0.53 0.59 0.46 6 Evantage Bronze 9908
169 3.83 5.48 0.53 0.59 0.46 6 Evantage Blue-Green 9907
170 3.83 5.48 0.73 0.76 0.66 6 Evantage Clear 9765
171 3.85 5.48 0.43 0.50 0.38 6 Evantage SuperGreen 9769
172 3.83 5.48 0.43 0.50 0.37 6 Evantage Super Blue 9906
173 3.63 5.48 0.80 0.84 0.70 6 EnergyTech 6mm 9741
174 3.60 5.37 0.76 0.80 0.66 10 EnergyTech 9743
175 3.67 5.48 0.57 0.64 0.50 6 EnergyTech Green 9747
176 3.65 5.48 0.47 0.55 0.41 6 EnergyTech SuperGreen 9750
177 3.71 5.48 0.55 0.61 0.48 6 EnergyTech Grey 9773
178 3.65 5.48 0.62 0.68 0.54 6 SolTech Clear 9754
179 3.62 5.36 0.58 0.64 0.51 10 SolTech Clear 9937
180 3.68 5.45 0.42 0.51 0.37 6 SolTech Grey 9955
181 4.12 5.48 0.69 0.73 0.60 6 Sunenergy Clear 4210
182 4.08 5.42 0.68 0.71 0.59 8 Sunenergy Clear 4211
183 4.05 5.36 0.66 0.70 0.58 10 Sunenergy Clear 4315
Viridian - Double Glazing

261 2.70 2.97 0.82 0.82 0.71 6 Vfloat Clear / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9708/9708
265 2.70 2.97 0.53 0.53 0.46 6 Vfloat Grey / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9714/9708
268 2.70 2.97 0.57 0.58 0.50 6 Vfloat Green / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9718/9708
269 2.67 2.93 0.43 0.43 0.37 10 Vfloat Geen / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 4271/9708
270 2.70 2.97 0.61 0.61 0.53 6 Vfloat Bronze / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 4269/9708
271 2.67 2.93 0.48 0.48 0.42 10 Vfloat Bronze / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 4284/9708
272 2.70 2.97 0.47 0.47 0.41 6 Vfloat SuperGreen / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9725/9708
273 2.70 2.97 0.25 0.25 0.22 6 Vfloat SuperGrey / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9894/9708
274 2.70 2.97 0.46 0.46 0.40 6 Vfloat SuperBlue / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9864/9708
275 2.68 2.93 0.37 0.37 0.32 10 Vfloat SuperBlue / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9866/9708
276 1.97 2.09 0.39 0.39 0.34 6 Vfloat EVantage Grey / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9911/9708
277 1.97 2.09 0.44 0.44 0.38 6 Vfloat EVantage Bronze / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9908/9708
278 1.97 2.09 0.44 0.44 0.38 6 EVantage Blue-Green / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9907/9708
279 1.97 2.09 0.64 0.65 0.56 6 EVantage Clear / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9765/9708
280 1.98 2.10 0.34 0.35 0.30 6 EVantage SuperGreen / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9769/9708
281 1.97 2.09 0.34 0.34 0.29 6 EVantage SuperBlue / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9906/9708
282 1.88 1.96 0.71 0.71 0.62 6 EnergyTech Clear / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9741/9708
283 1.88 1.97 0.66 0.66 0.58 6 EnergyTech Clear / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9743/9708
284 1.90 1.99 0.48 0.48 0.42 6 EnergyTech Green / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9747/9708
285 1.89 1.97 0.38 0.38 0.33 6 EnergyTech SuperGreen / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9750/9708
286 1.91 2.01 0.45 0.45 0.39 6 EnergyTech Grey / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9773/9708
287 1.89 1.98 0.53 0.53 0.46 6 SolTech Clear / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9754/9708
288 1.90 2.00 0.33 0.33 0.29 6 SolTech Grey / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9955/9708
289 1.88 1.96 0.69 0.69 0.60 6.38 ComfortPlus Clear / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 9726/9708
290 2.11 2.26 0.59 0.59 0.51 6 SunEnergy Clear / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 4210/9708
291 2.09 2.24 0.56 0.56 0.49 10 SunEnergy Clear / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 4315/9708
292 1.61 1.59 0.35 0.35 0.30 6 PerformaTech Silver 196 / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 11060/9708
293 1.61 1.59 0.29 0.29 0.25 6 PerformaTech Silver 236 / 12mm Air / 6mm Clear 11403/9708

Pilkington (Australia) – Single
300 5.82 5.94 0.94 0.94 0.82 6 Optifloat Clear 9804
301 5.74 5.42 0.91 0.91 0.79 8 Optifloat Clear 9805
302 5.69 5.38 0.88 0.88 0.77 10 Optifloat Clear 9806
303 5.59 5.29 0.84 0.84 0.73 12 Optifloat Clear 9807
304 5.82 5.48 0.67 0.65 0.58 6 Optifloat Grey 9834
305 5.69 5.38 0.55 0.53 0.47 10 Optifloat Grey 9836
306 5.59 5.29 0.49 0.49 0.42 12 Optifloat Grey 9837
307 5.82 5.48 0.72 0.71 0.62 6 Optifloat Blue-Green 9874
308 5.69 5.38 0.63 0.62 0.54 10 Optifloat Blue-Green 9876
309 5.82 5.48 0.73 0.71 0.63 6 Optifloat Bronze 9854
310 5.69 5.38 0.61 0.60 0.53 10 Optifloat Bronze 9856
311 3.83 5.48 0.72 0.75 0.62 6 Eclipse Advantage Clear 9909
312 3.83 5.48 0.48 0.55 0.41 6 Eclipse Advantage Grey 9911
313 3.83 5.48 0.53 0.59 0.48 6 Eclipse Advantage Bronze 9908
314 3.83 5.48 0.53 0.59 0.45 6 Eclipse Advantage Blue-Green 9907
315 3.83 5.48 0.43 0.50 0.36 6 Eclipse Advantage Evergreen 9910
316 3.83 5.48 0.42 0.50 0.36 6 Eclipse Advantage Artic Blue 9906
317 3.65 5.49 0.81 0.84 0.70 6 Energy Advantage 9924
320 3.64 5.41 0.60 0.66 0.51 6.38 Comfort Plus 6.38 Neutral 9702
321 3.62 5.41 0.58 0.64 0.49 6.38 Comfort Plus 6.38 Grey 9703
322 3.61 5.41 0.59 0.65 0.50 6.38 Comfort Plus 6.38 Green 9700
323 3.61 5.41 0.79 0.83 0.68 6.38 Comfort Plus 6.38 Clear 9701
324 5.82 5.49 0.94 0.94 0.82 6.38 Optilam Clear 6.38mm 9804
326 5.81 5.48 0.60 0.59 0.52 6 Evergreen 9884
330 4.91 5.48 0.36 0.38 0.30 6 Suncool TS21 on Clear (S2) 5774
331 4.91 5.48 0.34 0.36 0.29 6 Suncool TS21 on Grey (S2) 5776
332 4.91 5.48 0.35 0.37 0.29 6 Suncool TS21 on Green (S2) 5775
333 5.25 5.48 0.44 0.45 0.38 6 Suncool TS30 on Clear (S2) 5766
334 5.25 5.48 0.39 0.40 0.33 6 Suncool TS30 on Grey (S2) 5768
335 5.25 5.48 0.41 0.41 0.35 6 Suncool TS30 on Green (S2) 5767
336 4.97 5.48 0.38 0.40 0.32 6 Suncool SS22 on Clear (S2) 5790
337 4.97 5.48 0.35 0.37 0.30 6 Suncool SS22 on Grey (S2) 5792
338 4.97 5.48 0.36 0.38 0.30 6 Suncool SS22 on Green (S2) 5791
339 4.53 5.48 0.24 0.28 0.20 6 Suncool SS08 on Clear (S2) 5860
340 5.75 5.43 0.39 0.38 0.33 6.38 TS21 on Clear Laminate 5840
341 5.75 5.42 0.47 0.46 0.40 6.38 TS30 on Clear Laminate 5850
342 5.76 5.43 0.42 0.40 0.35 6.38 SL20 on Grey Laminate 5904
Pilkington Australia - Double Glazing

400 2.70 2.95 0.81 0.81 0.70 6 Optifloat Clear / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9804/9804
404 2.70 2.94 0.52 0.52 0.45 6 Optifloat Grey / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9834/9804
407 2.69 2.94 0.58 0.58 0.50 6 Optifloat Blue-Green / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9874/9804
409 2.69 2.94 0.58 0.58 0.50 6 Optifloat Bronze / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9854/9804
411 1.96 2.85 0.63 0.64 0.55 6 Eclipse Advantage Clear / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9909/9804
412 1.96 2.05 0.39 0.39 0.33 6 Eclipse Advantage Grey / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9911/9804
413 1.96 2.05 0.44 0.45 0.38 6 Eclipse Advantage Bronze / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9908/9804
414 1.96 2.05 0.44 0.44 0.38 6 Eclipse Advantage Blue-Green / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9907/9804
415 1.96 2.05 0.33 0.34 0.29 6 Eclipse Advantage Evergreen / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9910/9804
416 1.96 2.05 0.33 0.34 0.29 6 Eclipse Advantage Artic Blue / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9906/9804
417 1.88 1.93 0.71 0.71 0.62 6 Energy Advantage / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9924/9804
420 1.88 1.94 0.50 0.50 0.43 6.38 Comfort Plus Neutral / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9702/9804
421 1.87 1.92 0.48 0.48 0.41 6.38 Comfort Plus Grey / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9703/9804
422 1.87 1.92 0.49 0.50 0.43 6.38 Comfort Plus Green / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9700/9804
423 1.87 1.92 0.69 0.69 0.60 6.38 Comfort Plus Clear / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9701/9804
424 2.70 2.95 0.81 0.81 0.70 6.38 Optilam Clear / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9804/9804
426 2.70 2.94 0.46 0.46 0.40 6.38 Evergreen / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 9884/9804
430 2.41 2.61 0.25 0.26 0.22 6 Suncool TS21 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5774/9804
431 2.40 2.61 0.22 0.22 0.18 6 Suncool TS21 on Grey (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5776/9804
432 2.40 2.61 0.23 0.23 0.20 6 Suncool TS21 on Green (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5775/9804
433 2.53 2.75 0.33 0.33 0.28 6 Suncool TS30 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5766/9804
434 2.52 2.75 0.26 0.26 0.22 6 Suncool TS30 on Grey (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5768/9804
435 2.52 2.75 0.28 0.28 0.24 6 Suncool TS30 on Green (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5767/9804
436 2.43 2.64 0.27 0.28 0.23 6 Suncool SS22 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5790/9804
437 2.42 2.64 0.22 0.23 0.19 6 Suncool SS22 on Grey (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5792/9804
438 2.42 2.64 0.24 0.24 0.20 6 Suncool SS22 on Green (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5791/9804

439 2.26 2.44 0.16 0.16 0.14 6 Suncool SS08 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5806/9804
440 2.68 2.93 0.27 0.28 0.23 6.38 TS21 on Clear Laminate (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5840/9804
441 2.67 2.93 0.35 0.35 0.30 6.38 TS30 on Clear Laminate (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5850/9804
442 2.68 2.93 0.28 0.28 0.24 6.38 SL20 on Grey Laminate (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Clear IGU 5904/9804
450 1.88 1.93 0.77 0.77 0.67 6 Optifloat Clear / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9804/9924
454 1.88 1.93 0.46 0.46 0.40 6 Optifloat Grey / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9834/9924
457 1.88 1.93 0.52 0.53 0.45 6 Optifloat Blue-Green / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9874/9924
459 1.88 1.93 0.52 0.52 0.45 6 Optifloat Bronze / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9854/9924
461 1.78 1.88 0.61 0.61 0.53 6 Eclipse Advantage Clear / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9909/9924
462 1.78 1.88 0.36 0.37 0.31 6 Eclipse Advantage Grey / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9911/9924
463 1.78 1.88 0.41 0.41 0.36 6 Eclipse Advantage Bronze / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9908/9924
464 1.78 1.88 0.41 0.42 0.36 6 Eclipse Advantage Blue-Green / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9907/9924
465 1.78 1.88 0.31 0.32 0.27 6 Eclipse Advantage Evergreen / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9910/9924
466 1.78 1.88 0.31 0.32 0.27 6 Eclipse Adv Artic Blue / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9906/9924
470 1.75 1.78 0.48 0.48 0.42 6.38 Comfort Plus Neutral / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9702/9924
471 1.74 1.74 0.46 0.46 0.40 6.38 Comfort Plus Grey / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9703/9924
472 1.74 1.74 0.47 0.47 0.41 6.38 Comfort Plus Green / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9700/9924
473 1.74 1.74 0.67 0.67 0.58 6.38 Comfort Plus Clear / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9701/9924
474 1.88 1.93 0.77 0.77 0.67 6.38 Optilam Clear / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9804/9924
476 1.88 1.93 0.40 0.40 0.35 6.38 Evergreen / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 9884/9924
480 1.85 1.89 0.22 0.22 0.19 6 Suncool TS21 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5774/9924
481 1.85 1.89 0.17 0.18 0.15 6 Suncool TS21 on Grey (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5776/9924
482 1.85 1.89 0.19 0.19 0.16 6 Suncool TS21 on Green (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5775/9924
483 1.86 1.91 0.28 0.29 0.25 6 Suncool TS30 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5766/9924
484 1.86 1.91 0.21 0.21 0.18 6 Suncool TS30 on Grey (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5768/9924
485 1.86 1.91 0.23 0.23 0.20 6 Suncool TS30 on Green (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5767/9924
486 1.85 1.90 0.23 0.24 0.20 6 Suncool SS22 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5790/9924
487 1.85 1.90 0.18 0.18 0.15 6 Suncool SS22 on Grey (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5792/9924
488 1.85 1.90 0.19 0.20 0.17 6 Suncool SS22 on Green (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5791/9924
489 1.83 1.87 0.13 0.14 0.11 6 Suncool SS08 on Clear (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5806/9924
490 1.87 1.92 0.23 0.23 0.20 6.38 TS21 on Clear Lam (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5840/9924
491 1.87 1.92 0.30 0.31 0.26 6.38 TS30 on Clear Lam (S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5850/9924
492 1.87 1.92 0.22 0.22 0.19 6.38 SL20 on Grey Lamin(S2) / 12 Air / 6 Energy Adv IGU 5904/9924

Appendix G
Users Weather Data File
When “File” is selected from the weather location pull down list (clause 3-30) the program reads the hourly design dry
bulb and wet bulb temperatures for each month from a user nominated file; an example of which is shown below. The
name of the file is requested by the program at run time and the data must be entered in the file using the following
format.
The first 8 columns on each line are not read by the program and may be used to describe the line. The daily
range latitude hemisphere and the elevation for the particular location must be entered on the first line of the file
starting in columns 9-12, 14-17, 19, 20-25 respectively. Subsequent lines must have 12 values, corresponding to the
twelve months of the year from January to December, separated by one or more spaces. The first line after the daily
range contains the 6 am dry bulb temperatures. The second line the 6 am wet bulb temperatures. Two lines, each
of 12 values, are then entered for each one hour increment such that the file eventually contains 48 lines of 12
values, finishing with the wet bulb temperatures for 5 am. Data for all 24 hours must be entered regardless of the
number of hours of plant operation.
11.5 38.0 S 123

6AM DB 25.9 25.9 25.9 20.4 17.4 10.4 10.4 13.4 15.4 21.9 23.9 25.9
WB 18.6 18.6 18.1 16.1 14.1 9.6 9.9 11.6 13.1 15.6 17.6 18.1
7AM DB 26.3 26.3 26.3 20.8 17.8 10.8 10.8 13.8 15.8 22.3 24.3 26.3
WB 19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
8AM DB 26.3 26.3 26.3 20.8 17.8 10.8 10.8 13.8 15.8 22.3 24.3 26.3
WB 19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
9AM DB 27.3 27.3 27.3 21.8 18.8 11.8 11.8 14.8 16.8 23.3 25.3 27.3
WB 19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
10AM DB 28.6 28.6 28.6 23.1 20.1 13.1 13.1 16.1 18.1 24.6 26.6 28.6
WB 19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
11AM DB 29.6 29.6 29.6 24.1 21.1 14.1 14.1 17.1 19.1 25.6 27.6 29.6
WB 19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
NOONDB 30.6 30.6 30.6 25.1 22.1 15.1 15.1 18.1 20.1 26.6 28.6 30.6
WB 20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
1PM DB 32.0 32.0 32.0 26.5 23.5 16.5 16.5 19.5 21.5 28.0 30.0 32.0
WB 20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
2PM DB 33.0 33.0 33.0 27.5 24.5 17.5 17.5 20.5 22.5 29.0 31.0 33.0
WB 21.0 21.0 20.5 18.5 16.5 13.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 18.0 20.0 20.5
3PM DB 34.0 34.0 34.0 28.5 25.5 18.5 18.5 21.5 23.5 30.0 32.0 34.0
WB 21.0 21.0 20.5 18.5 16.5 13.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 18.0 20.0 20.5
4PM DB 33.0 33.0 33.0 27.5 24.5 17.5 17.5 20.5 22.5 29.0 31.0 33.0
WB 21.0 21.0 20.5 18.5 16.5 13.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 18.0 20.0 20.5
5PM DB 32.0 32.0 32.0 26.5 23.5 16.5 16.5 19.5 21.5 28.0 30.0 32.0
WB 20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
6PM DB 31.6 31.6 31.6 26.1 23.1 16.1 16.1 19.1 21.1 27.6 29.6 31.6
WB 20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
7PM DB 30.3 30.3 30.3 24.8 21.8 14.8 14.8 17.8 19.8 26.3 28.3 30.3
WB 20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
8PM DB 29.3 29.3 29.3 23.8 20.8 13.8 13.8 16.8 18.8 25.3 27.3 29.3
WB 20.0 20.0 19.5 17.5 15.5 11.9 11.7 13.0 14.5 17.0 19.0 19.5
9PM DB 27.9 27.9 27.9 22.4 19.4 12.4 12.4 15.4 17.4 23.9 25.9 27.9
WB 19.0 19.0 18.5 16.5 14.5 10.2 10.3 12.0 13.5 16.0 18.0 18.5
10PM DB 26.9 26.9 26.9 21.4 18.4 11.4 11.4 14.4 16.4 22.9 24.9 26.9
WB 18.6 18.6 18.1 16.1 14.1 9.6 9.9 11.6 13.1 15.6 17.6 18.1
11PM DB 25.9 25.9 25.9 20.4 17.4 10.4 10.4 13.4 15.4 21.9 23.9 25.9
WB 17.3 17.3 16.8 14.8 12.8 7.4 8.0 10.3 11.8 14.3 16.3 16.8
MIDN DB 24.9 24.9 24.9 19.4 16.4 9.4 9.4 12.4 14.4 20.9 22.9 24.9
WB 16.9 16.9 16.4 14.4 12.4 6.8 7.6 9.9 11.4 13.9 15.9 16.4
1AM DB 24.9 24.9 24.9 19.4 16.4 9.4 9.4 12.4 14.4 20.9 22.9 24.9
WB 16.9 16.9 16.4 14.4 12.4 6.8 7.6 9.9 11.4 13.9 15.9 16.4
2AM DB 24.9 24.9 24.9 19.4 16.4 9.4 9.4 12.4 14.4 20.9 22.9 24.9
WB 17.3 17.3 16.8 14.8 12.8 7.4 8.0 10.3 11.8 14.3 16.3 16.8
3AM DB 24.9 24.9 24.9 19.4 16.4 9.4 9.4 12.4 14.4 20.9 22.9 24.9
WB 17.3 17.3 16.8 14.8 12.8 7.4 8.0 10.3 11.8 14.3 16.3 16.8
4AM DB 25.9 25.9 25.9 20.4 17.4 10.4 10.4 13.4 15.4 21.9 23.9 25.9
WB 17.6 17.6 17.1 15.1 13.1 8.0 8.5 10.6 12.1 14.6 16.6 17.1
5AM DB 25.9 25.9 25.9 20.4 17.4 10.4 10.4 13.4 15.4 21.9 23.9 25.9
WB 18.6 18.6 18.1 16.1 14.1 9.6 9.9 11.6 13.1 15.6 17.6 18.1

References
1. AIRAH / IRHACE Application Manual DA9 - Air Conditioning Systems, Load Estimation and
Psychrometrics
2. ACADS-BSG - User Guide for the Computer Program Beaver
3. Mason and Hamilton - Some Practical Aspects of Cooling Load Estimation with Particular Reference
to the Carrier Method and the Computer Program Camel AIRAH Federal Conference March 1976
Melbourne.
4. Mason M. - So You Know How To Determine Air Conditioning Loads? AIRAH Federal Conference
April 1983 Sydney.
5. Mason and Kingston - Weather Data for Air Conditioning Load Calculations AIRAH Federal
Conference 1988 Sydney.
6. Delsante and Mason - An Expanded Climatic Data Base for Australia AIRAH Federal Conference
1990 Adelaide.
7. AS 1668.2-2012 The Use of Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning In Buildings

Camel5111 User Guide - PDF (9933)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Camel5111 User Guide - PDF (9933)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAMEL

First published for the Department of Housing and Construction 1981

Reprinted with amendments by ACADS-BSG (V5.11.1) DEC 2015

Review and Revision

Mechanical Engineering Services User Guides

Users Guide for the Computer Program Camel

2 Entering Data - General 8

3 Entering Data – Project Screens 23

4 Entering Data – AHU Screens 56

5 Calculating, Viewing and Printing Results 94

6 Data Checking and Error Messages 120

7 Technical Description 123

1-10 General Description

1-20 Program Features

CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 1

2 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

1-30 Program Limitations

1-40 Limitations Imposed by the Use of the Carrier Method

CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 3

1-50 Limitations Imposed by the Program

4 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

1-60 The CAMEL Program and Associated Programs and Files

1-70 Modelling Different Systems

CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 5

Mixed or Return air bypass systems.

Dump back system

100 Percent Outside air plant

Outside to Exhaust Air Heat Exchanger

6 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

Outside Air Preconditioner (Not Applicable to Evap. Cooling)

Evaporative Air Cooling

CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 7

Menu Bar or the appropriate Button – Project or AHU, Zone and

Moving Around the Screens

8 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

2-20 Getting Started

CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 9

The calculation can then be performed by clicking the calculate button.

Graph button. For further details refer 5-100.

10 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

2-30 Main Screen

Fig 2-30A The Main Screen Menu and Tool Bar

CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 11

Project Screens – refer clause 3-10

Graph – refer clause 5-100

Open Existing Project

Open New Project

12 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

View Input File

2-40 Setting Project Defaults

CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 13

Fig 2-40A The Project Defaults Screen

Locations in List Button

Locations in Selection List Form

14 CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG

2-50 The Configuration Screens

Fig 2-50A The Systems Configuration Screen

CAMEL User Guide  ACADS-BSG 15

Input files directory

Output files directory

Weather files directory

Glass Data Files Directory

The Colours Configuration